US20170140719A1 - Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof - Google Patents
Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20170140719A1 US20170140719A1 US15/358,815 US201615358815A US2017140719A1 US 20170140719 A1 US20170140719 A1 US 20170140719A1 US 201615358815 A US201615358815 A US 201615358815A US 2017140719 A1 US2017140719 A1 US 2017140719A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- transistor
- oxide semiconductor
- liquid crystal
- film
- layer
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 title claims abstract description 190
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title description 88
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 claims description 287
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 69
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 69
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 claims description 69
- 229910052733 gallium Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 16
- GYHNNYVSQQEPJS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Gallium Chemical compound [Ga] GYHNNYVSQQEPJS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 13
- 239000011701 zinc Substances 0.000 claims description 12
- 229910052725 zinc Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 8
- 229910052738 indium Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 7
- HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc Chemical compound [Zn] HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 5
- APFVFJFRJDLVQX-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium atom Chemical compound [In] APFVFJFRJDLVQX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 5
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 abstract description 3
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 388
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 296
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 153
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 84
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 58
- 238000003079 width control Methods 0.000 description 50
- 229910007541 Zn O Inorganic materials 0.000 description 45
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 description 41
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 41
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 41
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 39
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 37
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 32
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 32
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 31
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 31
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 30
- 239000012298 atmosphere Substances 0.000 description 28
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 26
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 26
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 23
- 229910001195 gallium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 22
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 20
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 20
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 20
- TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoalumanyloxy)alumane Chemical compound O=[Al]O[Al]=O TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 20
- XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc monoxide Chemical compound [Zn]=O XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 18
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 18
- 101100392125 Caenorhabditis elegans gck-1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 17
- 239000002585 base Substances 0.000 description 17
- AJNVQOSZGJRYEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N digallium;oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Ga+3].[Ga+3] AJNVQOSZGJRYEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 17
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 17
- WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten Chemical compound [W] WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 17
- 239000010937 tungsten Substances 0.000 description 17
- ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Molybdenum Chemical compound [Mo] ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 16
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 16
- 239000011733 molybdenum Substances 0.000 description 16
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 16
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 15
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 15
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 15
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 15
- 239000012535 impurity Substances 0.000 description 15
- 229910052750 molybdenum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 15
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 15
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 15
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 15
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 14
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 14
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 14
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 14
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 14
- 239000000565 sealant Substances 0.000 description 14
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 13
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 13
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 13
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 13
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 13
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 12
- 229910052581 Si3N4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 11
- HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon nitride Chemical compound N12[Si]34N5[Si]62N3[Si]51N64 HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 11
- 206010021143 Hypoxia Diseases 0.000 description 10
- 150000002431 hydrogen Chemical class 0.000 description 10
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 description 9
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 9
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 9
- 239000011787 zinc oxide Substances 0.000 description 9
- PMHQVHHXPFUNSP-UHFFFAOYSA-M copper(1+);methylsulfanylmethane;bromide Chemical compound Br[Cu].CSC PMHQVHHXPFUNSP-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 8
- PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium(III) oxide Inorganic materials [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[In+3].[In+3] PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 230000001681 protective effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 8
- 229910052795 boron group element Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000011810 insulating material Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000005192 partition Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 7
- 229910019092 Mg-O Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 229910019395 Mg—O Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000000956 alloy Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000011651 chromium Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000010949 copper Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000001312 dry etching Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000002349 favourable effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000000206 photolithography Methods 0.000 description 6
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 6
- 229910052715 tantalum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum atom Chemical compound [Ta] GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chlorine atom Chemical compound [Cl] ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromium Chemical compound [Cr] VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical compound [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000012790 adhesive layer Substances 0.000 description 5
- RNQKDQAVIXDKAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminum gallium Chemical compound [Al].[Ga] RNQKDQAVIXDKAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000000460 chlorine Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229910052801 chlorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000005262 ferroelectric liquid crystals (FLCs) Substances 0.000 description 5
- QZQVBEXLDFYHSR-UHFFFAOYSA-N gallium(III) oxide Inorganic materials O=[Ga]O[Ga]=O QZQVBEXLDFYHSR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- -1 indium (In) Chemical class 0.000 description 5
- 239000012299 nitrogen atmosphere Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000003870 refractory metal Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000001004 secondary ion mass spectrometry Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000001039 wet etching Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000004983 Polymer Dispersed Liquid Crystal Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910045601 alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000000919 ceramic Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 4
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000001747 exhibiting effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229910052735 hafnium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229910052736 halogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 210000003128 head Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 239000001307 helium Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052734 helium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- SWQJXJOGLNCZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-N helium atom Chemical compound [He] SWQJXJOGLNCZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 description 4
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000007769 metal material Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000005268 plasma chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000011241 protective layer Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000010453 quartz Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000000630 rising effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- JBQYATWDVHIOAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N tellanylidenegermanium Chemical compound [Te]=[Ge] JBQYATWDVHIOAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- VZGDMQKNWNREIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrachloromethane Chemical compound ClC(Cl)(Cl)Cl VZGDMQKNWNREIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- FAQYAMRNWDIXMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N trichloroborane Chemical compound ClB(Cl)Cl FAQYAMRNWDIXMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000004925 Acrylic resin Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920000178 Acrylic resin Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 101100392126 Caenorhabditis elegans gck-3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- MYMOFIZGZYHOMD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dioxygen Chemical compound O=O MYMOFIZGZYHOMD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorine atom Chemical compound [F] YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- XPDWGBQVDMORPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluoroform Chemical compound FC(F)F XPDWGBQVDMORPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910052779 Neodymium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nickel Chemical compound [Ni] PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Palladium Chemical compound [Pd] KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000002411 adverse Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910021417 amorphous silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- SWXQKHHHCFXQJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N azane;hydrogen peroxide Chemical compound [NH4+].[O-]O SWXQKHHHCFXQJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000018044 dehydration Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000006297 dehydration reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000006356 dehydrogenation reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000002542 deteriorative effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910001882 dioxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 238000007667 floating Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000011737 fluorine Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 150000002367 halogens Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 239000011261 inert gas Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000007257 malfunction Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 3
- QKCGXXHCELUCKW-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[4-[4-(dinaphthalen-2-ylamino)phenyl]phenyl]-n-naphthalen-2-ylnaphthalen-2-amine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC(N(C=3C=CC(=CC=3)C=3C=CC(=CC=3)N(C=3C=C4C=CC=CC4=CC=3)C=3C=C4C=CC=CC4=CC=3)C3=CC4=CC=CC=C4C=C3)=CC=C21 QKCGXXHCELUCKW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N neodymium atom Chemical compound [Nd] QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 150000004767 nitrides Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 238000001782 photodegradation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000009832 plasma treatment Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229920002620 polyvinyl fluoride Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229910052706 scandium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- SIXSYDAISGFNSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N scandium atom Chemical compound [Sc] SIXSYDAISGFNSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052718 tin Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 238000001771 vacuum deposition Methods 0.000 description 3
- UWCWUCKPEYNDNV-LBPRGKRZSA-N 2,6-dimethyl-n-[[(2s)-pyrrolidin-2-yl]methyl]aniline Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC(C)=C1NC[C@H]1NCCC1 UWCWUCKPEYNDNV-LBPRGKRZSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VXEGSRKPIUDPQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-[4-(4-methoxyphenyl)piperazin-1-yl]aniline Chemical compound C1=CC(OC)=CC=C1N1CCN(C=2C=CC(N)=CC=2)CC1 VXEGSRKPIUDPQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonia Chemical compound N QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KZBUYRJDOAKODT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chlorine Chemical compound ClCl KZBUYRJDOAKODT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000004986 Cholesteric liquid crystals (ChLC) Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910000846 In alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- BPQQTUXANYXVAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Orthosilicate Chemical compound [O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-] BPQQTUXANYXVAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910018503 SF6 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910020923 Sn-O Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 208000003464 asthenopia Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000011109 contamination Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002425 crystallisation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008025 crystallization Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008030 elimination Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003379 elimination reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000011152 fibreglass Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052732 germanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N germanium atom Chemical compound [Ge] GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VBJZVLUMGGDVMO-UHFFFAOYSA-N hafnium atom Chemical compound [Hf] VBJZVLUMGGDVMO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004435 hydrogen atom Chemical group [H]* 0.000 description 2
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009616 inductively coupled plasma Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910010272 inorganic material Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000011147 inorganic material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011229 interlayer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005468 ion implantation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- MRELNEQAGSRDBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N lanthanum(3+);oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[La+3].[La+3] MRELNEQAGSRDBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000004518 low pressure chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000011777 magnesium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052754 neon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- GKAOGPIIYCISHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N neon atom Chemical compound [Ne] GKAOGPIIYCISHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000010955 niobium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000059 patterning Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001020 plasma etching Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920006267 polyester film Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920000139 polyethylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000005020 polyethylene terephthalate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001721 polyimide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002035 prolonged effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000010948 rhodium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052594 sapphire Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010980 sapphire Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000005049 silicon tetrachloride Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052708 sodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000011734 sodium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003746 surface roughness Effects 0.000 description 2
- TXEYQDLBPFQVAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrafluoromethane Chemical compound FC(F)(F)F TXEYQDLBPFQVAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N tin dioxide Chemical compound O=[Sn]=O XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910001887 tin oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000013585 weight reducing agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- VHUUQVKOLVNVRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonium hydroxide Chemical compound [NH4+].[OH-] VHUUQVKOLVNVRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910014263 BrF3 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910020323 ClF3 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004985 Discotic Liquid Crystal Substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910005224 Ga2O Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- JMASRVWKEDWRBT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Gallium nitride Chemical compound [Ga]#N JMASRVWKEDWRBT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000005355 Hall effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- CPELXLSAUQHCOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen bromide Chemical compound Br CPELXLSAUQHCOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M Ilexoside XXIX Chemical compound C[C@@H]1CC[C@@]2(CC[C@@]3(C(=CC[C@H]4[C@]3(CC[C@@H]5[C@@]4(CC[C@@H](C5(C)C)OS(=O)(=O)[O-])C)C)[C@@H]2[C@]1(C)O)C)C(=O)O[C@H]6[C@@H]([C@H]([C@@H]([C@H](O6)CO)O)O)O.[Na+] DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 108010083687 Ion Pumps Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000004976 Lyotropic liquid crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Magnesium Chemical compound [Mg] FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001182 Mo alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004988 Nematic liquid crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000006124 Pilkington process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920012266 Poly(ether sulfone) PES Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004952 Polyamide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004962 Polyamide-imide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004642 Polyimide Substances 0.000 description 1
- KJTLSVCANCCWHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ruthenium Chemical compound [Ru] KJTLSVCANCCWHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000011842 Serrate-Jagged Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010036039 Serrate-Jagged Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000004990 Smectic liquid crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004974 Thermotropic liquid crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tin Chemical compound [Sn] ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001080 W alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910000611 Zinc aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N acrylic acid group Chemical group C(C=C)(=O)O NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052783 alkali metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001340 alkali metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- HXFVOUUOTHJFPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N alumane;zinc Chemical compound [AlH3].[Zn] HXFVOUUOTHJFPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JYMITAMFTJDTAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminum zinc oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[Al+3].[Zn+2] JYMITAMFTJDTAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910021529 ammonia Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000011114 ammonium hydroxide Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012300 argon atmosphere Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 1
- UMIVXZPTRXBADB-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzocyclobutene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CCC2=C1 UMIVXZPTRXBADB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KOPBYBDAPCDYFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N caesium oxide Chemical compound [O-2].[Cs+].[Cs+] KOPBYBDAPCDYFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001942 caesium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001721 carbon Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000006229 carbon black Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005229 chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003098 cholesteric effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910017052 cobalt Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010941 cobalt Substances 0.000 description 1
- GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N cobalt atom Chemical compound [Co] GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052681 coesite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000000356 contaminant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007797 corrosion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005260 corrosion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052906 cristobalite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001925 cycloalkenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000006378 damage Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007598 dipping method Methods 0.000 description 1
- KPUWHANPEXNPJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N disiloxane Chemical class [SiH3]O[SiH3] KPUWHANPEXNPJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000428 dust Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010891 electric arc Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005684 electric field Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005566 electron beam evaporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003822 epoxy resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- WRQGPGZATPOHHX-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl 2-oxohexanoate Chemical compound CCCCC(=O)C(=O)OCC WRQGPGZATPOHHX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005669 field effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011888 foil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000449 hafnium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- WIHZLLGSGQNAGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N hafnium(4+);oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[Hf+4] WIHZLLGSGQNAGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QOSATHPSBFQAML-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydrogen peroxide;hydrate Chemical compound O.OO QOSATHPSBFQAML-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910003437 indium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium;oxotin Chemical compound [In].[Sn]=O AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007733 ion plating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052741 iridium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N iridium atom Chemical compound [Ir] GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000001788 irregular Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052747 lanthanoid Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000002602 lanthanoids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000001307 laser spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052744 lithium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052749 magnesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- CPLXHLVBOLITMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N magnesium oxide Inorganic materials [Mg]=O CPLXHLVBOLITMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000395 magnesium oxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- AXZKOIWUVFPNLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N magnesium;oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[Mg+2] AXZKOIWUVFPNLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052748 manganese Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- QSHDDOUJBYECFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N mercury Chemical compound [Hg] QSHDDOUJBYECFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052753 mercury Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910001507 metal halide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000005309 metal halides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052758 niobium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- GUCVJGMIXFAOAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N niobium atom Chemical compound [Nb] GUCVJGMIXFAOAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000007645 offset printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011368 organic material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052762 osmium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- SYQBFIAQOQZEGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N osmium atom Chemical compound [Os] SYQBFIAQOQZEGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000007500 overflow downdraw method Methods 0.000 description 1
- SIWVEOZUMHYXCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoyttriooxy)yttrium Chemical compound O=[Y]O[Y]=O SIWVEOZUMHYXCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BPUBBGLMJRNUCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxygen(2-);tantalum(5+) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Ta+5].[Ta+5] BPUBBGLMJRNUCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052763 palladium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000003071 parasitic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005240 physical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000623 plasma-assisted chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005498 polishing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920003229 poly(methyl methacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006350 polyacrylonitrile resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006122 polyamide resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002312 polyamide-imide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000647 polyepoxide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001225 polyester resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004645 polyester resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011112 polyethylene naphthalate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000009719 polyimide resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004926 polymethyl methacrylate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920005990 polystyrene resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004800 polyvinyl chloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000915 polyvinyl chloride Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000002243 precursor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005086 pumping Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000746 purification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052703 rhodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- MHOVAHRLVXNVSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodium atom Chemical compound [Rh] MHOVAHRLVXNVSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052707 ruthenium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000005070 sampling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007650 screen-printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- VSZWPYCFIRKVQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N selanylidenegallium;selenium Chemical compound [Se].[Se]=[Ga].[Se]=[Ga] VSZWPYCFIRKVQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HBMJWWWQQXIZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon carbide Chemical compound [Si+]#[C-] HBMJWWWQQXIZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004528 spin coating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007921 spray Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052682 stishovite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000000859 sublimation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008022 sublimation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- SFZCNBIFKDRMGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N sulfur hexafluoride Chemical compound FS(F)(F)(F)(F)F SFZCNBIFKDRMGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000909 sulfur hexafluoride Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000002194 synthesizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920003002 synthetic resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000000057 synthetic resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910001936 tantalum oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052905 tridymite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FQFKTKUFHWNTBN-UHFFFAOYSA-N trifluoro-$l^{3}-bromane Chemical compound FBr(F)F FQFKTKUFHWNTBN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JOHWNGGYGAVMGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N trifluorochlorine Chemical compound FCl(F)F JOHWNGGYGAVMGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052724 xenon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N xenon atom Chemical compound [Xe] FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052727 yttrium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- VWQVUPCCIRVNHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N yttrium atom Chemical compound [Y] VWQVUPCCIRVNHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
- G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
- G09G3/3607—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals for displaying colours or for displaying grey scales with a specific pixel layout, e.g. using sub-pixels
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/1335—Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
- G02F1/133553—Reflecting elements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/1343—Electrodes
- G02F1/134309—Electrodes characterised by their geometrical arrangement
- G02F1/134336—Matrix
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/1343—Electrodes
- G02F1/13439—Electrodes characterised by their electrical, optical, physical properties; materials therefor; method of making
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/136—Liquid crystal cells structurally associated with a semi-conducting layer or substrate, e.g. cells forming part of an integrated circuit
- G02F1/1362—Active matrix addressed cells
- G02F1/136286—Wiring, e.g. gate line, drain line
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/136—Liquid crystal cells structurally associated with a semi-conducting layer or substrate, e.g. cells forming part of an integrated circuit
- G02F1/1362—Active matrix addressed cells
- G02F1/1368—Active matrix addressed cells in which the switching element is a three-electrode device
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
- G09G3/3406—Control of illumination source
- G09G3/342—Control of illumination source using several illumination sources separately controlled corresponding to different display panel areas, e.g. along one dimension such as lines
- G09G3/3426—Control of illumination source using several illumination sources separately controlled corresponding to different display panel areas, e.g. along one dimension such as lines the different display panel areas being distributed in two dimensions, e.g. matrix
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
- G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
- G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
- G09G3/3611—Control of matrices with row and column drivers
- G09G3/3648—Control of matrices with row and column drivers using an active matrix
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
- G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
- G09G3/3611—Control of matrices with row and column drivers
- G09G3/3674—Details of drivers for scan electrodes
- G09G3/3677—Details of drivers for scan electrodes suitable for active matrices only
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L27/00—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
- H01L27/02—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers
- H01L27/12—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being other than a semiconductor body, e.g. an insulating body
- H01L27/1214—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being other than a semiconductor body, e.g. an insulating body comprising a plurality of TFTs formed on a non-semiconducting substrate, e.g. driving circuits for AMLCDs
- H01L27/1222—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being other than a semiconductor body, e.g. an insulating body comprising a plurality of TFTs formed on a non-semiconducting substrate, e.g. driving circuits for AMLCDs with a particular composition, shape or crystalline structure of the active layer
- H01L27/1225—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being other than a semiconductor body, e.g. an insulating body comprising a plurality of TFTs formed on a non-semiconducting substrate, e.g. driving circuits for AMLCDs with a particular composition, shape or crystalline structure of the active layer with semiconductor materials not belonging to the group IV of the periodic table, e.g. InGaZnO
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L29/00—Semiconductor devices specially adapted for rectifying, amplifying, oscillating or switching and having potential barriers; Capacitors or resistors having potential barriers, e.g. a PN-junction depletion layer or carrier concentration layer; Details of semiconductor bodies or of electrodes thereof ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor
- H01L29/66—Types of semiconductor device ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor
- H01L29/68—Types of semiconductor device ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor controllable by only the electric current supplied, or only the electric potential applied, to an electrode which does not carry the current to be rectified, amplified or switched
- H01L29/76—Unipolar devices, e.g. field effect transistors
- H01L29/772—Field effect transistors
- H01L29/78—Field effect transistors with field effect produced by an insulated gate
- H01L29/786—Thin film transistors, i.e. transistors with a channel being at least partly a thin film
- H01L29/7869—Thin film transistors, i.e. transistors with a channel being at least partly a thin film having a semiconductor body comprising an oxide semiconductor material, e.g. zinc oxide, copper aluminium oxide, cadmium stannate
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/1343—Electrodes
- G02F1/134309—Electrodes characterised by their geometrical arrangement
- G02F1/134345—Subdivided pixels, e.g. for grey scale or redundancy
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/136—Liquid crystal cells structurally associated with a semi-conducting layer or substrate, e.g. cells forming part of an integrated circuit
- G02F1/1362—Active matrix addressed cells
- G02F1/13624—Active matrix addressed cells having more than one switching element per pixel
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/136—Liquid crystal cells structurally associated with a semi-conducting layer or substrate, e.g. cells forming part of an integrated circuit
- G02F1/1362—Active matrix addressed cells
- G02F1/13624—Active matrix addressed cells having more than one switching element per pixel
- G02F1/136245—Active matrix addressed cells having more than one switching element per pixel having complementary transistors
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F2201/00—Constructional arrangements not provided for in groups G02F1/00 - G02F7/00
- G02F2201/12—Constructional arrangements not provided for in groups G02F1/00 - G02F7/00 electrode
- G02F2201/123—Constructional arrangements not provided for in groups G02F1/00 - G02F7/00 electrode pixel
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F2202/00—Materials and properties
- G02F2202/10—Materials and properties semiconductor
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F2203/00—Function characteristic
- G02F2203/01—Function characteristic transmissive
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
- G09G2300/08—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
- G09G2300/0809—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels
- G09G2300/0842—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor
- G09G2300/0852—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor being a dynamic memory with more than one capacitor
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2310/00—Command of the display device
- G09G2310/02—Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
- G09G2310/0235—Field-sequential colour display
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
- G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
- G09G2320/0242—Compensation of deficiencies in the appearance of colours
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2340/00—Aspects of display data processing
- G09G2340/06—Colour space transformation
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a liquid crystal display device and a method for driving the liquid crystal display device.
- liquid crystal display devices are roughly divided into two kinds of liquid crystal display devices: transmissive liquid crystal display devices and reflective liquid crystal display devices.
- a backlight such as a cold cathode fluorescent lamp is used, and a state in which light from the backlight is transmitted through a liquid crystal and output to the outside of the liquid crystal display device or a state in which light is not output is selected using optical modulation action of liquid crystal, whereby bright and dark images are displayed. Further, those displays are combined to display an image.
- a state in which external light, in other words, incident light is reflected at a pixel electrode and output to the outside of the device or a state in which incident light is not output to the outside of the device is selected using optical modulation action of liquid crystal, whereby bright and dark images are displayed. Further, those displays are combined to display an image.
- a color filter method and a field-sequential method are known as display methods of liquid crystal display devices.
- Liquid crystal display devices in which images are displayed by a field-sequential method are provided with a plurality of light sources exhibiting different colors (e.g., red (R), green (G), and blue (B)).
- a desired color is produced in such a manner that the plurality of light sources exhibiting different colors sequentially emit light and transmission of a light of each color is controlled in each pixel, so that color display is performed.
- a field-sequential method is a method in which a desired color is realized with division of the display period into respective display periods for respective lights of colors.
- Patent Document 1 discloses a liquid crystal display device in which images are displayed by a field-sequential method. Specifically, Patent Document 1 discloses a liquid crystal display device in which pixels each include a transistor for controlling input of an image signal, a signal storage capacitor for holding the image signal, and a transistor for controlling transfer of electric charge from the signal storage capacitor to a display pixel capacitor. In the liquid crystal display device having this structure, writing of an image signal to the signal storage capacitor and display corresponding to electric charge held at the display pixel capacitor can be performed at the same time.
- Patent Document 1 Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2009-42405
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of image display according to an environment around the liquid crystal display device, e.g., in a bright environment or a dim environment.
- Another object is to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of image display in both modes of a reflective mode in which external light is used as a light source and a transmissive mode in which a backlight is used.
- One embodiment of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device which is provided with a region (a reflective region) where display is performed with reflection of incident light through a liquid crystal layer and a region (a transmissive region) where display is performed with transmission of light from a backlight and can switch the transmissive mode and the reflective mode.
- a transmissive region a first transistor connected to a first pixel electrode in the transmissive region is driven and a second transistor connected to a second pixel electrode in the reflective region is turned off.
- the first pixel electrode is formed using a conductive material transmitting light
- the second pixel electrode is formed using a conductive material reflecting light.
- a period in which the second transistor connected to the second pixel electrode in the reflective region is turned on is provided every one frame or every plural frames, and an image signal of black is held in the reflective region during the period.
- An image signal of black is held in the reflective region in the transmissive mode, so that reduction in contrast due to reflection of external light at the reflective region can be prevented.
- the reflective region and the transmissive region are provided in one pixel and a signal line for supplying an image signal is shared by the reflective region and the transmissive region, whereby the number of wirings per pixel can be reduced.
- the first transistor in the transmissive region is connected to a signal line and the second transistor in the reflective region is connected to the signal line via the first transistor. In the reflective mode, the first transistor and the second transistor are turned on, so that an image signal is supplied from the signal line to the reflective region.
- Display in the transmissive region is performed by a novel field-sequential method in which image signal writing and lighting of the backlight are sequentially performed not in the whole pixel portion but in each given region of the pixel portion.
- a novel field-sequential method in which image signal writing and lighting of the backlight are sequentially performed not in the whole pixel portion but in each given region of the pixel portion.
- LEDs light-emitting diodes
- the novel field-sequential method enables reduction of the phenomenon that a user sees display which is changed (degraded) from display based on original display data.
- Such a phenomenon is caused by lack of specific display data due to block of the display for a short time, such as a user's blink, and is referred to as a color break or color breakup.
- One embodiment of the present invention disclosed in this specification includes a panel including a pixel portion and a driving circuit which controls input of image signals to the pixel portion; and a backlight.
- the backlight includes a plurality of light sources emitting lights of different hues.
- driving methods of the light sources are switched depending on whether a full-color image is displayed or a monochrome image is displayed.
- the pixel portion When a full-color image is displayed, a transmissive mode utilizing the novel field-sequential method is set, and the pixel portion is divided into a plurality of regions and lighting of the light sources is controlled per region.
- the pixel portion includes at least a first region and a second region, a plurality of lights of different hues are sequentially supplied to the first region according to a first order, and a plurality of lights of different hues are also sequentially supplied to the second region according to a second order which is different from the first order.
- the driving frequency is lower than that in the case where the monochrome image is a moving image.
- a liquid crystal element and an insulated gate field effect transistor whose off-state current is extremely low (hereinafter referred to simply as a transistor) for controlling holding of a voltage applied to the liquid crystal element are provided in a pixel portion of a liquid crystal display device in order to lower the driving frequency.
- One embodiment of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device including a plurality of light sources emitting lights of different hues and a pixel portion including a plurality of pixels.
- Each pixel includes a first pixel electrode transmitting light, a second pixel electrode reflecting light, a first transistor, and a second transistor.
- One of a source and a drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to a signal line, the other of the source and the drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to the first pixel electrode and one of a source and a drain of the second transistor, and the other of the source and the drain of the second transistor is electrically connected to the second pixel electrode.
- One embodiment of the present invention is the above liquid crystal display device, in which color display is performed by dividing the pixel portion into a plurality of regions, controlling lighting of a plurality of light sources emitting lights of different hues in each of the plurality of regions, and driving the first transistor to apply a voltage to a part of a liquid crystal layer overlapping with the first pixel electrode, and monochrome display is performed by driving the first transistor and the second transistor to apply a voltage to a part of the liquid crystal layer overlapping with the second pixel electrode in a period during which a plurality of light sources is off.
- One embodiment of the present invention is the above liquid crystal display device, in which the pixel portion is divided into at least a first region and a second region, a plurality of lights of different hues are sequentially supplied to the first region according to a first order, and a plurality of lights of different hues are also sequentially supplied to the second region according to a second order which is different from the first order.
- the above transistors each include, in a channel formation region, a semiconductor material having a wider band gap and a lower intrinsic carrier density than silicon.
- a channel formation region including a semiconductor material having the above characteristics, a transistor with an extremely low off-state current can be realized.
- an oxide semiconductor having a band gap which is approximately three times as wide as that of silicon can be given.
- a transistor that has the above-described structure and is used as a switching element for holding a voltage applied to a liquid crystal element can effectively prevent leakage of electric charge from the liquid crystal element.
- the above-described pixel portion includes a region where the transmittance of a liquid crystal layer is controlled according to a voltage of a full-color image signal that is input, a first transistor which controls holding of a voltage that is to be applied to the liquid crystal layer overlapping with the above-described region, a region where the reflectance of the liquid crystal layer is controlled according to a voltage of a monochrome image signal that is input, and a second transistor which controls holding of a voltage that is to be applied to the liquid crystal layer overlapping with the latter region.
- a channel formation region of each of the first and second transistors includes a semiconductor material having a wider band gap and a lower intrinsic carrier density than a silicon semiconductor, such as an oxide semiconductor.
- an oxide semiconductor which is purified (purified OS) by reduction of an impurity such as moisture or hydrogen which serves as an electron donor (donor) can be made to be an i-type (intrinsic) oxide semiconductor or an oxide semiconductor extremely close to an i-type semiconductor (a substantially i-type oxide semiconductor) by supplying oxygen to the oxide semiconductor to reduce oxygen deficiency in the oxide semiconductor.
- a transistor including the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor has a characteristic of extremely low off-state current.
- the hydrogen concentration in the purified oxide semiconductor which is measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS) is less than or equal to 5 ⁇ 10 19 /cm 3 , preferably less than or equal to 5 ⁇ 10 18 /cm 3 , further preferably less than or equal to 5 ⁇ 10 17 /cm 3 , still further preferably less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 16 /cm 3 .
- the carrier density of the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor which is measured by Hall effect measurement, is less than 1 ⁇ 10 14 /cm 3 , preferably less than 1 ⁇ 10 12 /cm 3 , further preferably less than 1 ⁇ 10 11 /cm 3 .
- the band gap of the oxide semiconductor is 2 eV or more, preferably 2.5 eV or more, further preferably 3 eV or more.
- the transistor including the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor can have low off-state current.
- the analysis of the concentration of hydrogen in the oxide semiconductor film is described here.
- the concentrations of hydrogen in the oxide semiconductor film and a conductive film are measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS). It is known that it is difficult to obtain data in the proximity of a surface of a sample or in the proximity of an interface between stacked films formed using different materials by the SIMS analysis in principle. Thus, in the case where distributions of the hydrogen concentrations of the films in thickness directions are analyzed by SIMS, an average value in a region where the films are provided, the value is not greatly changed, and almost the same value can be obtained are employed as the hydrogen concentration.
- the maximum value or the minimum value of the hydrogen concentration of a region where the films are provided is employed as the hydrogen concentration in the film.
- the value of the inflection point is employed as the hydrogen concentration.
- off-state current of the transistor including the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor film as an active layer can actually prove low off-state current of the transistor including the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor film as an active layer.
- off-state current which is drain current in the case where voltage between a gate electrode and the source electrode is 0 V or less
- the measurement limit of a semiconductor parameter analyzer that is, less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 13 A.
- an off-state current density corresponding to a value obtained by dividing the off-state current by the channel width of the transistor is less than or equal to 100 zA/ ⁇ m.
- a capacitor and a transistor were connected to each other and an off-state current density was measured by using a circuit in which electric charge flowing into or from the capacitor was controlled by the transistor.
- the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor film was used for a channel formation region of the transistor, and the off-state current density of the transistor was measured from a change in the amount of charge of the capacitor per unit time.
- the off-state current density of the transistor in which the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor film is used as an active layer can be set to less than or equal to 100 yA/ ⁇ m, preferably less than or equal to 10 yA/ ⁇ m, further preferably less than or equal to 1 yA/ ⁇ m depending on the voltage between the source electrode and the drain electrode. Accordingly, the transistor including the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor film as an active layer has much lower off-state current than a transistor including silicon having crystallinity.
- a four-component metal oxide such as an In—Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, a three-component metal oxide such as an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, an In—Sn—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, an In—Al—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, a Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, an Al—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, or a Sn—Al—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, a two-component metal oxide such as an In—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, a Sn—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, an Al—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, a Zn—Mg—O-based oxide semiconductor, a Sn—Mg—O-based oxide semiconductor, an In—Mg—O-based oxide semiconductor, or an In—Ga—O-based oxide semiconductor, an In—O-based oxide semiconductor, a Sn—O-based oxide semiconductor,
- an In—Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor means a metal oxide including indium (In), tin (Sn), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn).
- the above oxide semiconductor may include silicon oxide. Note that the oxide semiconductor may be amorphous or crystallized partly or entirely.
- the oxide semiconductor is preferably formed over a level (flat) surface.
- the oxide semiconductor is preferably formed over a surface whose average surface roughness (Ra) is 1 nm or less, further preferably 0.3 nm or less.
- Ra can be measured using an atomic force microscope (AFM).
- the oxide semiconductor preferably includes In, and further preferably includes In and Zn.
- Ga, Sn, Hf, Al, or a lanthanoid may be included in the above oxide semiconductor. Dehydration or dehydrogenation is effective for purification of the oxide semiconductor.
- oxide semiconductors can be represented by the chemical formula, InMO 3 (ZnO) m (m >0), for example.
- M represents one or more metal elements selected from Sn, Zn, Ga, Al, Mn, and Co.
- a liquid crystal display device capable of image display using a reflective mode utilizing external light as a light source and a transmissive mode utilizing a backlight according to an environment around the liquid crystal display device, e.g., in a bright environment or a dim environment. For example, a moving image is displayed using a transmissive mode, and a still image is displayed using a reflective mode.
- black is displayed in the reflective region, so that reduction in contrast due to reflection of external light at the reflective region can be prevented.
- a period during which a voltage applied to a liquid crystal element is held can be longer. Accordingly, for example, the driving frequency with which a still image is displayed can be lower than that with which a moving image is displayed. Therefore, a liquid crystal display device with reduced power consumption in displaying a still image can be realized.
- FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a structure of a liquid crystal display device.
- FIGS. 2A and 2B illustrate configurations of a panel and a pixel.
- FIG. 3 schematically shows operations of a liquid crystal display device and a backlight.
- FIGS. 4A to 4C schematically illustrate an example of hues of light supplied to regions.
- FIG. 5 schematically illustrates an example of turning off of light supplied to regions.
- FIG. 6 illustrates a configuration of a scan line driver circuit.
- FIG. 7 schematically illustrates an x-th pulse output circuit 20 _ x.
- FIG. 8A illustrates a configuration of a pulse output circuit and FIGS. 8B and 8C are timing diagrams thereof.
- FIG. 9 is a timing diagram of a scan line driver circuit.
- FIG. 10 is a timing diagram of a scan line driver circuit.
- FIG. 11 illustrates a configuration of a signal line driver circuit.
- FIGS. 12A and 12B show examples of timing of image signals (DATA) supplied to signal lines.
- FIG. 13 shows timing of scanning of selection signals and timing of lighting of a backlight.
- FIG. 14 shows timing of scanning of selection signals and timing of turning off of a backlight.
- FIGS. 15A and 15B are diagrams each showing a configuration of a pulse output circuit.
- FIGS. 16A and 16B are diagrams each showing a configuration of a pulse output circuit.
- FIGS. 17A to 17C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method for manufacturing a transistor.
- FIGS. 18A to 18D are cross-sectional views of transistors.
- FIGS. 19A to 19C are cross-sectional views of transistors.
- FIGS. 20A, 20B, 20C, 20C ′, 20 D, 20 D′, 20 E, and 20 E′ are cross-sectional views illustrating methods for manufacturing liquid crystal display devices.
- FIGS. 21A to 21C are diagrams illustrating a manufacturing method of a liquid crystal display device.
- FIGS. 22A and 22B illustrate an example of a top view and a cross-sectional view of a pixel.
- FIG. 23 illustrates an example of a top view of a pixel.
- FIGS. 24A and 24B are a top view and a cross-sectional view illustrating a liquid crystal display device.
- FIG. 25 illustrates an example of forming a liquid crystal layer by a dispenser method.
- FIG. 26 is a perspective view illustrating a structure of a liquid crystal display device.
- FIGS. 27A to 27F are views of electronic devices.
- FIGS. 28A and 28B are cross-sectional views of transistors.
- FIGS. 29A to 29C illustrate one embodiment of an oxide semiconductor layer.
- a liquid crystal display device including a still-image mode and a moving-image mode will be described with reference to FIG. 1 .
- a mode performed in such a way that a display device determines image signals input to the display device as a still image is described as a still-image mode
- a mode performed in such a way that the display device determines the image signals input to the display device as a moving image is described as a moving-image mode.
- a liquid crystal display device 400 in this embodiment includes a plurality of image memories 401 , an image data selection circuit 402 , a selector 403 , a CPU 404 , a controller 405 , a panel 406 , a backlight 407 , and a backlight control circuit 408 .
- Image data corresponding to a full-color image (full-color image data 410 ), which are input to the liquid crystal display device 400 , are stored in the plurality of image memories 401 .
- the full-color image data 410 include image data corresponding to their respective hues.
- the image data corresponding to the respective hues are stored in the respective image memories 401 .
- image memories 401 for example, memory circuits such as dynamic random access memories (DRAMs) or static random access memories (SRAMs) can be used.
- DRAMs dynamic random access memories
- SRAMs static random access memories
- the image data selection circuit 402 reads the full-color image data, which are stored in the plurality of image memories 401 and correspond to the respective hues, and sends the full-color image data to the selector 403 according to a command from the controller 405 .
- image data corresponding to a monochrome image are also input to the liquid crystal display device 400 . Then, the monochrome image data 411 are input to the selector 403 .
- an image displayed with color gradations by using a plurality of light sources of colors having different hues is a full-color image.
- an image displayed by using a reflective electrode with the light sources turned off is a monochrome image.
- the structure in which the monochrome image data 411 are directly input to the selector 403 is employed in this embodiment, the structure of one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this structure.
- the monochrome image data 411 may also be stored in the image memories 401 and then read by the image data selection circuit 402 similarly to the full-color image data 410 . In that case, the selector 403 is included in the image data selection circuit 402 .
- the monochrome image data 411 may be formed by synthesizing the full-color image data 410 in the liquid crystal display device 400 .
- the CPU 404 controls the selector 403 and the controller 405 so that the operations of the selector 403 and the controller 405 are switched between full-color image display and monochrome image display.
- the selector 403 selects the full-color image data 410 and supplies them to the panel 406 in accordance with a command from the CPU 404 .
- the controller 405 supplies the panel 406 with a driving signal which is synchronized with the full-color image data 410 and/or a power supply potential which is to be used when the full-color image is displayed, in accordance with a command from the CPU 404 .
- the selector 403 selects the monochrome image data 411 and supplies them to the panel 406 in accordance with a command from the CPU 404 .
- the controller 405 supplies the panel 406 with a driving signal which is synchronized with the monochrome image data 411 and/or a power supply potential which is to be used when the monochrome image is displayed, in accordance with a command from the CPU 404 .
- the panel 406 includes a pixel portion 412 in which each pixel includes a liquid crystal element, and drivers circuits such as a scan line driver circuit 414 and a signal line driver circuit 413 .
- the full-color image data 410 or the monochrome image data 411 from the selector 403 are supplied to the signal line driver circuit 413 .
- the driving signals and/or the power supply potential from the controller 405 are/is supplied to the scan line driver circuit 414 and/or the signal line driver circuit 413 .
- the driving signals include a signal line driver circuit start pulse signal (SSP) and a signal line driver circuit clock signal (SCK) which control the operation of the signal line driver circuit 413 ; a scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) and a scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK) which control the operation of the scan line driver circuit 414 ; and the like.
- SSP signal line driver circuit start pulse signal
- SCK signal line driver circuit clock signal
- GSP scan line driver circuit start pulse signal
- GCK scan line driver circuit clock signal
- GCK scan line driver circuit clock signal
- an input device 420 may be provided in the liquid crystal display device 400 so that the CPU 404 controls the switching in accordance with a signal from the input device 420 .
- a user controls switching between full-color image display and monochrome image display with the use of a switch or the like provided for the liquid crystal display device 400 .
- the liquid crystal display device 400 described in this embodiment may also include a photometric circuit 421 .
- the photometric circuit 421 measures the brightness of an environment where the liquid crystal display device 400 is used.
- the CPU 404 may control the switching between full-color image display and monochrome image display in accordance with the brightness detected by the photometric circuit 421 .
- the CPU 404 may select full-color image display in accordance with a signal from the photometric circuit 421 ; in the case where the liquid crystal display device 400 is used in a bright environment, the CPU 404 may select monochrome image display in accordance with a signal from the photometric circuit 421 .
- a threshold value may be set in the photometric circuit 421 so that the backlight is turned on when the brightness of a usage environment becomes less than the threshold value.
- FIG. 2A illustrates a structural example of the liquid crystal display device.
- the liquid crystal display device illustrated in FIG. 2A includes a pixel portion 10 , a scan line driver circuit 11 , and a signal line driver circuit 12 .
- the pixel portion 10 is divided into a plurality of regions. Specifically, the pixel portion 10 is divided into three regions (a region 101 , a region 102 , and a region 103 ) in FIG. 2A . Each region includes a plurality of pixels 15 arranged in a matrix.
- m scan lines GL whose potentials are controlled by the scan line driver circuit 11
- n signal lines SL whose potentials are controlled by the signal line driver circuit 12
- enable lines ENR connected to terminals 61 to 63 are provided for the pixel portion 10 .
- the m scan lines GL are divided into a plurality of groups in accordance with the number of regions of the pixel portion 10 .
- the m scan lines GL are divided into three groups because the pixel portion 10 is divided into three regions in FIG. 2A .
- the scan lines GL in each group are connected to the plurality of pixels 15 in each corresponding region.
- each scan line GL is connected to n pixels 15 in each corresponding row among the plurality of pixels 15 arranged in a matrix in the corresponding region.
- FIG. 2A illustrates a structure in which the enable line ENR included in the region 101 is connected to the terminal 61 , the enable line ENR included in the region 102 is connected to the terminal 62 , and the enable line ENR included in the region 103 is connected to the terminal 63 .
- a terminal connected to an enable line ENR is provided in each region of the pixel portion 10 , whereby a potential supplied to the enable line ENR through the terminal can be controlled in each region.
- Each of the terminals 61 to 63 may be provided in plural.
- each of the signal lines SL is connected to m pixels 15 in each corresponding column among the plurality of pixels 15 arranged in a matrix of m rows by n columns in the pixel portion 10 .
- FIG. 2B illustrates an example of a circuit configuration of one of the pixels 15 included in the liquid crystal display device illustrated in FIG. 2A .
- the pixel 15 is broadly divided into a transmissive region 13 where light from the backlight is transmitted through a pixel electrode formed using a light-transmitting conductive film and a reflective region 14 where a reflective electrode reflects incident light through a liquid crystal layer.
- the transmissive region 13 includes a first pixel transistor 16 a , a first liquid crystal element 18 a , and a first capacitor 17 a .
- a gate of the first pixel transistor 16 a is connected to the scan line GL, a first terminal serving as one of a source and a drain of the first pixel transistor 16 a is connected to the signal line SL, a second terminal serving as the other of the source and the drain of the first pixel transistor 16 a is connected to one electrode of the first liquid crystal element 18 a and a first electrode of the first capacitor 17 a .
- the other electrode of the first liquid crystal element 18 a is connected to a common electrode.
- a second electrode of the first capacitor 17 a is connected to a capacitor line.
- the first capacitor 17 a functions as a storage capacitor for holding a voltage applied to the first liquid crystal element 18 a.
- the reflective region 14 includes a second pixel transistor 16 b , a second liquid crystal element 18 b , and a second capacitor 17 b .
- a gate of the second pixel transistor 16 b is connected to an enable line ENR, a first terminal serving as one of a source and a drain of the second pixel transistor 16 b is connected to the second terminal of the first pixel transistor 16 a , a second terminal serving as the other of the source and the drain of the second pixel transistor 16 b is connected to one electrode of the second liquid crystal element 18 b and a first electrode of the second capacitor 17 b .
- the other electrode of the second liquid crystal element 18 b is connected to the common electrode.
- a second electrode of the second capacitor 17 b is connected to the capacitor line.
- the second capacitor 17 b functions as a storage capacitor for holding a voltage applied to the second liquid crystal element 18 b.
- the first capacitor 17 a in the transmissive region 13 can be used as a storage capacitor for holding a voltage applied to the second liquid crystal element 18 b in the reflective region 14 .
- a layout area of the storage capacitor can be reduced.
- the scan lines GL are driven by the scan line driver circuit 11 .
- image signals are supplied to the signal lines SL from the signal line driver circuit 12 .
- a driver circuit needs to be driven at extremely high frequency in the case where field-sequential driving is performed.
- the capacitance of the first capacitor 17 a in the transmissive region 13 needs to be reduced.
- the capacitance of the second capacitor 17 b in the reflective region 14 may be increased, so that display of an image can be maintained for a long time.
- the off-state current of each of the transistors connected to the capacitors is high, the capacitance of the first capacitor 17 a and the capacitance of the second capacitor 17 b need to be increased more than necessary so that image signals can be surely held.
- each of the first pixel transistor 16 a and the second pixel transistor 16 b is preferably a transistor including an oxide semiconductor layer.
- a transistor including an oxide semiconductor layer has extremely low off-state current, so that the capacitance of the first capacitor 17 a and the capacitance of the second capacitor 17 b can be reduced.
- a period during which a voltage applied to the second liquid crystal element 18 b can be prolonged.
- the potential of an image signal can be held for a longer period, so that without the second capacitor 17 b for holding a potential of an image signal connected to the second liquid crystal element 18 b , the quality of the displayed image can be prevented from being lowered.
- a transistor including a compound semiconductor such as silicon carbide (SiC) or gallium nitride (GaN) may be used without limitation to a transistor including an oxide semiconductor layer as long as the semiconductor has a wider band gap and a lower intrinsic carrier density than a silicon semiconductor.
- Each of the first liquid crystal element 18 a and the second liquid crystal element 18 b includes a pixel electrode, a counter electrode, and a liquid crystal layer including a liquid crystal to which a voltage between the pixel electrode and the counter electrode is applied.
- a liquid crystal material used in a liquid crystal layer the following can be given: a nematic liquid crystal, a cholesteric liquid crystal, a smectic liquid crystal, a discotic liquid crystal, a thermotropic liquid crystal, a lyotropic liquid crystal, a low-molecular liquid crystal, a polymer dispersed liquid crystal (PDLC), a ferroelectric liquid crystal, an anti-ferroelectric liquid crystal, a main-chain liquid crystal, a side-chain high-molecular liquid crystal, a banana-shaped liquid crystal, and the like.
- a nematic liquid crystal a cholesteric liquid crystal, a smectic liquid crystal, a discotic liquid crystal, a thermotropic liquid crystal, a lyotropic liquid crystal, a low-molecular liquid crystal, a polymer dispersed liquid crystal (PDLC), a ferroelectric liquid crystal, an anti-ferroelectric liquid crystal, a main-chain liquid crystal, a side-chain high-molecular
- liquid crystal exhibiting a blue phase for which an alignment film is unnecessary may be used.
- a blue phase is one of liquid crystal phases, which is generated just before a cholesteric phase changes into an isotropic phase while temperature of cholesteric liquid crystal is increased. Since the blue phase is only generated within a narrow range of temperature, a chiral agent or an ultraviolet curable resin is added so that the temperature range is improved.
- the liquid crystal composition which includes a liquid crystal showing a blue phase and a chiral agent is preferable, because it has a short response time of greater than or equal to 10 ⁇ sec and less than or equal to 100 ⁇ sec. Another reason is because it is optically isotropic and therefore alignment treatment is not necessary and viewing angle dependence is small.
- the following methods can be used for driving the liquid crystal, for example: a TN (twisted nematic) mode, an STN (super twisted nematic) mode, a VA (vertical alignment) mode, an MVA (multi-domain vertical alignment) mode, an IPS (in-plane-switching) mode, an OCB (optically compensated birefringence) mode, an ECB (electrically controlled birefringence) mode, an FLC (ferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, an AFLC (anti-ferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, a PDLC (polymer dispersed liquid crystal) mode, a PNLC (polymer network liquid crystal) mode, and a guest-host mode.
- a TN twisted nematic
- VA vertical alignment
- MVA multi-domain vertical alignment
- IPS in-plane-switching
- OCB optical compensated birefringence
- ECB electrically controlled birefringence
- FLC ferrroelectric liquid crystal
- the pixel 15 may further include another circuit element such as a transistor, a diode, a resistor, a capacitor, or an inductor as needed.
- another circuit element such as a transistor, a diode, a resistor, a capacitor, or an inductor as needed.
- inversion driving in which the polarity of the potential of an image signal is inverted using a potential of a counter electrode as a reference potential, deterioration of a liquid crystal called burn-in can be prevented.
- the inversion driving the change in the potential supplied to the signal line is increased at the time of changing the polarity of the image signal; thus, a potential difference between a source electrode and a drain electrode of the second pixel transistor 16 b is increased. Accordingly, deterioration of characteristics of the second pixel transistor 16 b , such as a shift in threshold voltage, is easily caused.
- the second pixel transistor 16 b in order to maintain a voltage held in the second liquid crystal element 18 b , a low off-state current is required even when the potential difference between the source electrode and the drain electrode is large.
- a semiconductor such as an oxide semiconductor is used for the second pixel transistor 16 b ; therefore, the pressure resistance of the second pixel transistor 16 b can be increased and the off-state current can be made extremely low. Therefore, in contrast to a transistor formed using a semiconductor material such as silicon or germanium, the second pixel transistor 16 b can be prevented from deteriorating and the voltage held in the second liquid crystal element 18 b can be maintained effectively.
- FIG. 3 schematically shows operations of the liquid crystal display device and operations of the backlight.
- the operations of the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention is roughly divided into an operation in a period in which a full-color image is displayed (a full-color image display period 301 ), an operation in a period in which a monochrome moving image is displayed (a monochrome moving image display period 302 ), and an operation in a period in which a monochrome still image is displayed (a monochrome still image display period 303 ).
- one frame period consists of a plurality of subframe periods. In each of the subframe periods, writings of image signals to the pixel portion is performed. While an image is being displayed, driving signals are successively supplied to the driver circuits such as the scan line driver circuit and the signal line driver circuit. Therefore, the driver circuits are operated in the full-color image display period 301 .
- the hue of the light supplied to the pixel portion from the backlight is switched every subframe period. Image signals corresponding to their respective hues are written to the pixel portion sequentially. The image signals corresponding to all of the hues are written in one frame period, whereby one image is formed. Accordingly, in the full-color image display period 301 , the number of writings of the image signals to the pixel portion in one frame period is more than one and is determined by the number of the hues of the lights supplied from the backlight.
- the monochrome moving image display period 302 As in the full-color image display period 301 , writings of image signals to the pixel portion is performed every frame period. While an image is being displayed, driving signals are successively supplied to the driver circuits such as the scan line driver circuit and the signal line driver circuit. Therefore, the driver circuits are operated in the monochrome moving image display period 302 .
- the hue of the light supplied to the pixel portion from the backlight is not switched every frame period, and a light of one hue is successively supplied to the pixel portion.
- One image can be formed by sequentially writing an image signal corresponding to one hue to the pixel portion in one frame period. Accordingly, in the monochrome moving image display period 302 , the number of writings of the image signals to the pixel portion in one frame period is one.
- the driving signals are supplied to the driver circuits during the writings of the image signals to the pixel portion, and after the writings are completed, the supply of the driving signals to the driver circuits is stopped. Therefore, the driver circuits are not operated in the monochrome still image display period 303 except during the writings of the image signals.
- the backlight remains off.
- one image is formed by sequentially writing image signals to the pixel portion in one frame period. Accordingly, in the monochrome still image display period 303 , the number of writings of the image signals to the pixel portion in one frame period is one.
- one frame period can be extremely prolonged to, for example, one minute or longer.
- the period in which the driver circuits are not operated can be long, so that power consumption of the liquid crystal display device can be reduced.
- the liquid crystal display device does not need to be provided with a color filter. Therefore, the cost can be lower than that of a liquid crystal display device including a color filter.
- FIGS. 4A to 4C schematically illustrate an example of the hues of lights supplied to the regions. Note that FIGS. 4A to 4C illustrate the case where the pixel portion is divided into three regions as in FIG. 2A . Further, FIGS. 4A to 4C illustrate the case where the backlight supplies lights of red (R), blue (B), and green (G) to the pixel portion.
- FIG. 4A shows the first subframe period in which a light of red (R) is supplied to the region 101 , a light of green (G) is supplied to the region 102 , and a light of blue (B) is supplied to the region 103 .
- FIG. 4B shows the second subframe period in which a light of green (G) is supplied to the region 101 , a light of blue (B) is supplied to the region 102 , and a light of red (R) is supplied to the region 103 .
- FIG. 4C shows the third subframe period, in which a light of blue (B) is supplied to the region 101 , a light of red (R) is supplied to the region 102 , and a light of green (G) is supplied to the region 103 .
- each hue of lights supplied to the regions takes a round of the regions, with which a full-color image can be displayed.
- the hue of the supplied light is changed in the order of red (R), green (G), and blue (B); the hue of the supplied light is changed in the order of green (G), blue (B), and red (R); and the hue of the supplied light is changed in the order of blue (B), red (R), and green (G).
- the plurality of lights having different hues are supplied sequentially to each of the regions in accordance with the order that is different between the regions.
- FIGS. 4A to 4C illustrate the example in which a light having one hue is supplied to one region in each subframe; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example.
- the hues of the lights supplied to the regions may be changed in order of completion of the writing of the image signal.
- a region irradiated with the light of the hue does not necessarily correspond to the region formed by dividing the pixel portion.
- FIG. 5 shows an example in which the pixel portion is divided into three regions as in FIG. 2A . As shown in FIG. 5 , all the light sources of the backlight are off in the regions 101 , 102 , and 103 .
- FIG. 6 illustrates a configuration example of the scan line driver circuit 11 illustrated in FIG. 2A .
- the scan line driver circuit 11 in FIG. 6 includes first to m-th pulse output circuits 20 _ 1 to 20 _ m . Selection signals are output from the first to m-th pulse output circuits 20 _ 1 to 20 _ m and supplied to m scan lines GL (scan lines GL1 to GLm).
- First to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK 1 to GCK 4 ), first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC 1 to PWC 6 ), and the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) are supplied as driving signals to the scan line driver circuit 11 .
- FIG. 6 illustrates the case where the first to j-th pulse output circuits 20 _ 1 to 20 _ j (j is a multiple of 4 and less than m/2) are connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLj provided in the region 101 , respectively. Further, the (j+1)-th to 2j-th pulse output circuits 20 _ j +1 to 20 _2j are connected to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j provided in the region 102 , respectively. Further, the (2j+1)-th to m-th pulse output circuits 20 _2j+1 to 20 _ m are connected to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GLm provided in the region 103 , respectively.
- the first to m-th pulse output circuits 20 _ 1 to 20 _ m begin to operate in response to the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) that is input to the first pulse output circuit 20 _ 1 , and output selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially.
- GSP scan line driver circuit start pulse signal
- Circuits having the same configuration can be applied to the first to m-th pulse output circuits 20 _ 1 to 20 _ m .
- a specific connection relation of the first to m-th pulse output circuits 20 _ 1 to 20 _ m is described with reference to FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 7 schematically illustrates the x-th pulse output circuit 20 _ x (x is a natural number less than or equal to m).
- Each of the first to m-th pulse output circuits 20 _ 1 to 20 _ m has terminals 21 to 27 .
- the terminals 21 to 24 and the terminal 26 are input terminals, and the terminals 25 and 27 are output terminals.
- the terminal 21 of the first pulse output circuit 20 _ 1 is connected to a wiring for supplying the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP).
- the terminal 21 of each of the second to m-th pulse output circuits 20 _ 2 to 20 _ m is connected to the terminal 27 of each corresponding previous-stage pulse output circuit.
- the terminal 22 of the (4a ⁇ 3)-th pulse output circuit 20 _(4a ⁇ 3) (a is a natural number less than or equal to m/4) is connected to a wiring for supplying the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 1 ).
- the terminal 22 of the (4a ⁇ 2)-th pulse output circuit 20 _(4a ⁇ 2) is connected to a wiring for supplying the second scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 2 ).
- the terminal 22 of the (4a ⁇ 1)-th pulse output circuit 20 _(4a ⁇ 1) is connected to a wiring for supplying the third scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 3 ).
- the terminal 22 of the 4a-th pulse output circuit 20 _4a is connected to a wiring for supplying the fourth scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 4 ).
- the terminal 23 of the (4a ⁇ 3)-th pulse output circuit 20 _(4a ⁇ 3) is connected to the wiring for supplying the second scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 2 ).
- the terminal 23 of the (4a ⁇ 2)-th pulse output circuit 20 _(4a ⁇ 2) is connected to the wiring for supplying the third scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 3 ).
- the terminal 23 of the (4a ⁇ 1)-th pulse output circuit 20 _(4a ⁇ 1) is connected to the wiring for supplying the fourth scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 4 ).
- the terminal 23 of the 4a-th pulse output circuit 20 _4a is connected to the wiring for supplying the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 1 ).
- the terminal 24 of the (2b ⁇ 1)-th pulse output circuit 20 _(2b ⁇ 1) (b is a natural number less than or equal to j/2) is connected to a wiring for supplying the first pulse width control signal (PWC 1 ).
- the terminal 24 of the 2b-th pulse output circuit 20 _2b is connected to a wiring for supplying the fourth pulse width control signal (PWC 4 ).
- the terminal 24 of the (2c ⁇ 1)-th pulse output circuit 20 _(2c ⁇ 1) (c is a natural number greater than or equal to (j/2+1) and less than or equal to j) is connected to a wiring for supplying the second pulse width control signal (PWC 2 ).
- the terminal 24 of the 2c-th pulse output circuit 20 _2c is connected to a wiring for supplying the fifth pulse width control signal (PWC 5 ).
- the terminal 24 of the (2d ⁇ 1)-th pulse output circuit 20 _(2d ⁇ 1) (d is a natural number greater than or equal to (j+1) and less than or equal to m/2) is connected to a wiring for supplying the third pulse width control signal (PWC 3 ).
- the terminal 24 of the 2d-th pulse output circuit 20 _2d is connected to a wiring for supplying the sixth pulse width control signal (PWC 6 ).
- the terminal 25 of the x-th pulse output circuit 20 _ x is connected to the scan line GLx in the x-th row.
- the terminal 26 of the y-th pulse output circuit 20 _ y (y is a natural number less than or equal to (m ⁇ 1)) is connected to the terminal 27 of the (y+1)-th pulse output circuit 20 _(y+1).
- the terminal 26 of the m-th pulse output circuit 20 _ m is connected to a wiring for supplying a stop signal (STP) for the m-th pulse output circuit.
- the stop signal (STP) for the m-th pulse output circuit corresponds to a signal output from the terminal 27 of the (m+1)-th pulse output circuit 20 _(m+1).
- these signals can be supplied to the m-th pulse output circuit 20 _ m by providing the (m+1)-th pulse output circuit 20 _(m+1) as a dummy circuit or by directly inputting these signals from the outside.
- FIG. 8A illustrates an example of a specific configuration of the x-th pulse output circuit 20 _ x illustrated in FIG. 7 .
- the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 8A includes transistors 31 to 39 .
- a gate electrode of the transistor 31 is connected to the terminal 21 .
- a first terminal of the transistor 31 is connected to a node supplied with a high power supply potential (Vdd).
- a second terminal of the transistor 31 is connected to a gate electrode of the transistor 33 and a gate electrode of the transistor 38 .
- a gate electrode of the transistor 32 is connected to a gate electrode of the transistor 34 and a gate electrode of the transistor 39 .
- a first terminal of the transistor 32 is connected to a node supplied with a low power supply potential (Vss).
- a second terminal of the transistor 32 is connected to the gate electrode of the transistor 33 and the gate electrode of the transistor 38 .
- a first terminal of the transistor 33 is connected to the terminal 22 .
- a second terminal of the transistor 33 is connected to the terminal 27 .
- a first terminal of the transistor 34 is connected to the node supplied with the low power supply potential (Vss).
- a second terminal of the transistor 34 is connected to the terminal 27 .
- a gate electrode of the transistor 35 is connected to the terminal 21 .
- a first terminal of the transistor 35 is connected to the node supplied with the low power supply potential (Vss).
- a second terminal of the transistor 35 is connected to the gate electrode of the transistor 34 and the gate electrode of the transistor 39 .
- a gate electrode of the transistor 36 is connected to the terminal 26 .
- a first terminal of the transistor 36 is connected to the node supplied with the high power supply potential (Vdd).
- a second terminal of the transistor 36 is connected to the gate electrode of the transistor 34 and the gate electrode of the transistor 39 . Note that it is possible to employ a structure in which the first terminal of the transistor 36 is connected to a node supplied with a power supply potential (Vcc) which is higher than the low power supply potential (Vss) and lower than the high power supply potential (Vdd).
- a gate electrode of the transistor 37 is connected to the terminal 23 .
- a first terminal of the transistor 37 is connected to the node supplied with the high power supply potential (Vdd).
- a second terminal of the transistor 37 is connected to the gate electrode of the transistor 34 and the gate electrode of the transistor 39 . Note that the first terminal of the transistor 37 may be connected to the node supplied with the power supply potential (Vcc).
- a first terminal of the transistor 38 is connected to the terminal 24 .
- a second terminal of the transistor 38 is connected to the terminal 25 .
- a first terminal of the transistor 39 is connected to the node supplied with the low power supply potential (Vss).
- a second terminal of the transistor 39 is connected to the terminal 25 .
- FIG. 8B shows an example of a timing diagram of the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 8A .
- Periods t 1 to t 7 shown in FIG. 8B have the same length of time.
- the length of each of the periods t 1 to t 7 corresponds to 1 ⁇ 3 of a pulse width of each of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK 1 to GCK 4 ), and corresponds to 1 ⁇ 2 of a pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC 1 to PWC 6 ).
- a potential input to the terminal 21 is at a high level and potentials input to the terminal 22 , the terminal 23 , the terminal 24 , and the terminal 26 are at a low level in the periods t 1 and t 2 . Consequently, low-level potentials are output from the terminal 25 and the terminal 27 .
- the potentials input to the terminal 21 and the terminal 24 are at a high level and the potentials input to the terminal 22 , the terminal 23 , and the terminal 26 are at a low level. Consequently, a high-level potential is output from the terminal 25 and a low-level potential is output from the terminal 27 .
- the potentials input to the terminal 22 and the terminal 24 are at a high level and the potentials input to the terminal 21 , the terminal 23 , and the terminal 26 are at a low level. Consequently, high-level potentials are output from the terminal 25 and the terminal 27 .
- the potential input to the terminal 22 is at a high level and the potentials input to the terminal 21 , the terminal 23 , the terminal 24 , and the terminal 26 are at a low level. Consequently, a low-level potential is output from the terminal 25 and a high-level potential is output from the terminal 27 .
- the potentials input to the terminal 23 and the terminal 26 are at a high level and the potentials input to the terminal 21 , the terminal 22 , and the terminal 24 are at a low level. Consequently, low-level potentials are output from the terminal 25 and the terminal 27 .
- FIG. 8C shows another example of the timing diagram of the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 8A .
- Periods t 1 to t 7 in FIG. 8C have the same length of time.
- the length of each of the periods t 1 to t 7 corresponds to 1 ⁇ 3 of the pulse width of each of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK 1 to GCK 4 ), and corresponds to 1 ⁇ 3 of the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC 1 to PWC 6 ).
- the potential input to the terminal 21 is at a high level and the potentials input to the terminal 22 , the terminal 23 , the terminal 24 , and the terminal 26 are at a low level in the periods t 1 to t 3 . Consequently, low-level potentials are output from the terminal 25 and the terminal 27 .
- FIG. 9 shows an example of a timing diagram of the scan line driver circuit 11 in the full-color image display period 301 .
- a subframe period SF 1 , a subframe period SF 2 , a subframe period SF 3 , and a subframe period SFK are provided in one frame period in FIG. 9 .
- a timing diagram of the subframe period SF 1 is used as a typical example.
- the scan lines GL1 to GLj are connected to the pixels of the region 101
- the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j are connected to the pixels of the region 102
- the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j are connected to the pixels of the region 103 .
- the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 1 ) periodically repeats a high-level potential (the high power supply potential (Vdd)) and a low-level potential (the low power supply potential (Vss)), and has a duty ratio of 1 ⁇ 4.
- the second scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 2 ) is a signal whose phase lags behind that of the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 1 ) by 1 ⁇ 4 of its cycle
- the third scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 3 ) is a signal whose phase lags behind that of the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 1 ) by 1 ⁇ 2 of its cycle
- the fourth scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 4 ) is a signal whose phase lags behind that of the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 1 ) by 3 ⁇ 4 of its cycle.
- the first pulse width control signal (PWC 1 ) periodically repeats a high-level potential (the high power supply potential (Vdd)) and a low-level potential (the low power supply potential (Vss)), and has a duty ratio of 1 ⁇ 3.
- the second pulse width control signal (PWC 2 ) is a signal whose phase lags behind the first pulse width control signal (PWC 1 ) by 1 ⁇ 6 of its cycle
- the third pulse width control signal (PWC 3 ) is a signal whose phase lags behind the first pulse width control signal (PWC 1 ) by 1 ⁇ 3 of its cycle
- the fourth pulse width control signal (PWC 4 ) is a signal whose phase lags behind the first pulse width control signal (PWC 1 ) by 1 ⁇ 2 of its cycle
- the fifth pulse width control signal (PWC 5 ) is a signal whose phase lags behind the first pulse width control signal (PWC 1 ) by 2 ⁇ 3 of its cycle
- the sixth pulse width control signal (PWC 6 ) is
- the ratio of the pulse width of each of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK 1 to GCK 4 ) to the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC 1 to PWC 6 ) is 3:2.
- Each of the subframe periods SF starts in response to falling of the potential of the pulse of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP).
- the pulse width of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK 1 to GCK 4 ).
- the falling of the potential of the pulse of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) is synchronized with rising of the potential of the pulse of the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 1 ).
- the falling of the potential of the pulse of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) lags behind rising of the potential of the pulse of the first pulse width control signal (PWC 1 ) by 1 ⁇ 6 of a cycle of the first pulse width control signal (PWC 1 ).
- the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 8A is operated by the above signals in accordance with the timing diagram in FIG. 8B . Accordingly, as illustrated in FIG. 9 , the selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are supplied to the scan lines GL1 to GLj for the region 101 . Further, the phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL1 to GLj are each shifted by a period corresponding to 3/2 of the pulse width. Note that the pulse width of each of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL1 to GLj is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC 1 to PWC 6 ).
- selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are supplied to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j for the region 102 . Further, the phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j are each shifted by a period corresponding to 3/2 of the pulse width. Note that the pulse width of each of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC 1 to PWC 6 ).
- selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are supplied to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j for the region 103 . Further, the phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j are each shifted by a period corresponding to 3/2 of the pulse width. Note that the pulse width of each of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC 1 to PWC 6 ).
- the phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL1, GLj+1, and GL2j+1 are shifted sequentially by a period corresponding to 1 ⁇ 2 of the pulse width.
- a selection signal is supplied to the enable lines ENR, so that all the second pixel transistors 16 b in the pixel portion 10 are turned on. Then, the scan lines GL1 to GLm are selected, to which potentials for displaying black in the reflective region 14 are supplied from the signal lines SL 1 to SLn through the first pixel transistors 16 a and the second pixel transistors 16 b . After that, the potentials of the enable lines ENR are set to potentials for turning off the second pixel transistors 16 b.
- FIG. 10 shows an example of a timing diagram of the scan line driver circuit 11 in the monochrome still image display period 303 .
- a writing period in which writings of image signals to pixels are performed and a holding period in which the image signals are held are provided in one frame period.
- the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK 1 to GCK 4 ) are the same signals as those in the case of FIG. 9 .
- the first pulse width control signal (PWC 1 ) and the fourth pulse width control signal (PWC 4 ) periodically repeat a high-level potential (the high power supply potential (Vdd)) and a low-level potential (the low power supply potential (Vss)) and have a duty ratio of 1 ⁇ 2 in the first 1 ⁇ 3 period of the writing period. Further, in the other periods in the writing period, the first pulse width control signal (PWC 1 ) and the fourth pulse width control signal (PWC 4 ) have the low-level potentials.
- the fourth pulse width control signal (PWC 4 ) is a signal whose phase lags behind that of the first pulse width control signal (PWC 1 ) by 1 ⁇ 2 of its cycle.
- the second pulse width control signal (PWC 2 ) and the fifth pulse width control signal (PWC 5 ) periodically repeat a high-level potential (the high power supply potential (Vdd)) and a low-level potential (the low power supply potential (Vss)) and have a duty ratio of 1 ⁇ 2 in the middle 1 ⁇ 3 period of the writing period. In the other periods in the writing period, the second pulse width control signal (PWC 2 ) and the fifth pulse width control signal (PWC 5 ) have the low-level potential.
- the fifth pulse width control signal (PWC 5 ) is a signal whose phase lags behind the second pulse width control signal (PWC 2 ) by 1 ⁇ 2 of its cycle.
- the third pulse width control signal (PWC 3 ) and the sixth pulse width control signal (PWC 6 ) periodically repeat a high-level potential (the high power supply potential (Vdd)) and a low-level potential (the low power supply potential (Vss)) and have a duty ratio of 1 ⁇ 2 in the last 1 ⁇ 3 period of the writing period. In the other periods in the writing period, the third pulse width control signal (PWC 3 ) and the sixth pulse width control signal (PWC 6 ) have the low-level potential.
- the sixth pulse width control signal (PWC 6 ) is a signal whose phase lags behind the third pulse width control signal (PWC 3 ) by 1 ⁇ 2 of its cycle.
- the ratio of the pulse width of each of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK 1 to GCK 4 ) with respect to the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC 1 to PWC 6 ) is 1:1.
- a frame period F starts in response to falling of the potential of the pulse of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP).
- the pulse width of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK 1 to GCK 4 ).
- the falling of the potential of the pulse of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) is synchronized with rising of the potential of the pulse of the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK 1 ).
- the falling of the potential of the pulse of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) is synchronized with rising of the potential of a pulse of the first pulse width control signal (PWC 1 ).
- the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 8A is operated by the above signals in accordance with the timing diagram in FIG. 8C . Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 10 , the selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are supplied to the scan lines GL1 to GLj for the region 101 . Further, the phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL1 to GLj are each shifted by a period corresponding to the pulse width. Note that the pulse width of each of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL1 to GLj is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC 1 to PWC 6 ).
- the selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are supplied to all of the scan lines GL1 to GLj for the region 101 .
- the selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are also supplied to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j for the region 102 .
- the phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j are each shifted by a period corresponding to the pulse width. Note that the pulse width of each of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC 1 to PWC 6 ).
- the selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are supplied to all of the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j for the region 102 .
- the selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are also supplied to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j for the region 103 .
- the phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j are each shifted by a period corresponding to the pulse width. Note that the pulse width of each of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC 1 to PWC 6 ).
- the operation of the scan line driver circuit 11 in the writing period is the same as that in the monochrome still image display period 303 .
- FIG. 11 illustrates a structural example of the signal line driver circuit 12 included in the liquid crystal display device in FIG. 2A .
- the signal line driver circuit 12 includes a shift register 120 having first to n-th output terminals and a switching element group 123 which controls supply of image signals (DATA) to the signal lines SL 1 to SLn.
- DATA image signals
- the switching element group 123 includes transistors 121 _ 1 to 121 _ n .
- First terminals of the transistors 121 _ 1 to 121 _ n are connected to a wiring for supplying the image signals (DATA).
- Second terminals of the transistors 121 _ 1 to 121 _ n are connected to the signal lines SL 1 to SLn, respectively.
- Gate electrodes of the transistors 121 _ 1 to 121 _ n are connected to the first to n-th output terminals of the shift register 120 , respectively.
- the shift register 120 operates in accordance with a driving signal such as a signal line driver circuit start pulse signal (SSP) and a signal line driver circuit clock signal (SCK), and outputs signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially from the first to n-th output terminals.
- the signals are input to the gate electrodes of the transistors 121 _ 1 to 121 _ n to turn on the transistors 121 _ 1 to 121 _ n sequentially.
- FIG. 12A shows an example of the timing of image signals (DATA) supplied to the signal lines in the full-color image display period 301 .
- an image signal (DATA) for the scan line whose pulse appears first is sampled and input to the signal lines in the signal line driver circuit 12 illustrated in FIG. 11 .
- the pulse of the selection signal input to the scan line GL1 and the pulse of the selection signal input to the scan line GLj+1 overlap with each other in a period t 4 corresponding to 1 ⁇ 2 of the pulse width.
- the pulse of the scan line GL1 appears before the pulse of the scan line GLj+1.
- an image signal (data1) among the image signals (DATA) for the scan line GL1 is sampled and input to the signal lines SL 1 to SLn.
- an image signal (dataj+1) for the scan line GLj+1 is sampled and input to the signal lines SL 1 to SLn.
- an image signal (data2j+1) for the scan line GL2j+1 is sampled and input to the signal lines SL 1 to SLn.
- an image signal (data2) for the scan line GL2 is sampled and input to the signal lines SL 1 to SLn.
- the same operation is repeated and image signals (DATA) are written to the pixel portion.
- input of the image signals to the signal lines SL 1 to SLn is performed in the following order: pixels connected to the scan line GLs (s is a natural number less than j); pixels connected to the scan line GLj+s; pixels connected to the scan line GL2j+s; and pixels connected to the scan line GLs+1.
- FIG. 12B shows an example of the timing of the image signals (DATA) supplied to the signal lines in the writing period provided in the monochrome moving image display period 302 and the monochrome still image display period 303 .
- the image signal (DATA) to the scan line is sampled and input to the signal lines in the writing period provided in the monochrome moving image display period 302 and the monochrome still image display period 303 .
- the image signal (data1) among the image signals (DATA) for the scan line GL1 is sampled and input to the signal lines SL 1 to SLn.
- FIG. 13 shows the timing of scanning of the selection signals and the timing of lighting of the backlight in the full-color image display period 301 in the above-described liquid crystal display device. Note that in FIG. 13 , the vertical axis represents rows in the pixel portion, and the horizontal axis represents time.
- a driving method in which a selection signal is supplied to the scan line GL1 and then a selection signal is supplied to the scan line GLj+1, which is the j-th rows from the scan line GL1, can be used in the full-color image display period 301 .
- the image signals can be supplied to the pixels in one subframe period SF in such a manner that n pixels connected to the scan line GL1 to n pixels connected to the scan line GLj are sequentially selected, n pixels connected to the scan line GLj+1 to n pixels connected to the scan line GL2j are sequentially selected, and n pixels connected to the scan line GL2j+1 to n pixels connected to the scan line GL3j are sequentially selected.
- image signals for red (R) are written in the pixels connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLj, and then a light of red (R) is supplied to the pixels connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLj.
- a light of red (R) is supplied to the pixels connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLj.
- image signals for green (G) are written in the pixels connected to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j, and then a light of green (G) is supplied to the pixels connected to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j.
- a light of green (G) is supplied to the pixels connected to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j.
- image signals for blue (B) are written in the pixels connected to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j, and then a light of blue (B) is supplied to the pixels connected to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j.
- a light of blue (B) is supplied to the pixels connected to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j.
- the same operation as in the first subframe period SF 1 is repeated in a second subframe period SF 2 and a third subframe period SF 3 .
- an image for blue (B) is displayed in the region 101 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL1 to GLj; an image for red (R) is displayed in the region 102 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j; and an image for green (G) is displayed in the region 103 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j.
- an image for green (G) is displayed in the region 101 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL1 to GLj; an image for blue (B) is displayed in the region 102 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j; and an image for red (R) is displayed in the region 103 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j.
- a selection signal is supplied to the enable line ENR in the region 101 through the terminal 61 , and image signals for black (K) are written to the region 101 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL1 to GLj.
- a selection signal is supplied to the enable line ENR in the region 102 through the terminal 62 , and image signals for black (K) are written to the region 102 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j.
- a selection signal is supplied to the enable line ENR in the region 103 through the terminal 63 , and image signals for black (K) are written to the region 103 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j.
- the first to third subframe periods SF 1 to SF 3 and the subframe period SFK in all of the scan lines GL are terminated, that is, one frame period is completed, whereby a full-color image can be displayed in the pixel portion.
- image signals for black (K) it is also possible to write image signals for black (K) to all the pixels 15 in the pixel portion 10 at once, instead of writing image signals for black (K) to each region.
- the backlight of the region 101 is turned off after the third frame period SF 3 is terminated in the region 101
- the backlight of the region 102 is turned off after the third frame period SF 3 is terminated in the region 102
- the backlight of the region 103 is turned off after the third frame period SF 3 is terminated in the region 103 .
- a selection signal is supplied to all the enable lines ENR, the scan lines GL1 to GL3j are selected, and image signals for black (K) are written to all the pixels 15 .
- the second pixel transistor 16 b is not provided in the reflective region 14 , and one electrode of the second liquid crystal element 18 b and the first electrode of the second capacitor 17 b in the reflective region 14 are connected to the second terminal of the first pixel transistor 16 a in the transmissive region 13 . In that case, however, image signals are written to the second capacitor 17 b and the second liquid crystal element 18 b which do not contribute to display in the full-color image display period 301 , whereby power consumption and writing time are increased.
- the second pixel transistor 16 b is provided in the reflective region 14 and is turned off during the full-color image display period 301 , so that increase in power consumption can be suppressed and writing time of an image signal can be reduced.
- a subframe period SFK is provided in each frame period, during which an image signal of black is held in the reflective region 14 , so that a decrease in contrast due to reflection of external light at the reflective region 14 during the full-color image display period 301 can be prevented.
- This embodiment describes a structure in which a subframe period SFK is provided every one frame; however, by using a transistor including an oxide semiconductor layer as the second pixel transistor 16 b , the writing interval of image signals to the reflective region 14 by a subframe period SFK can be as long as several hundreds of frames or several thousands of frames; thus, power consumption can be further suppressed.
- each of the regions may be further divided into regions.
- lighting of the backlight may start sequentially in response to the termination of writings of image signals.
- the following method may be employed: in the region 101 , image signals for red (R) are written to the pixels connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLh (h is a natural number less than or equal to j/4); and then, a light of red (R) is supplied to the pixels connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLh while image signals for red (R) are written to the pixels connected to the scan lines GLh+1 to GL2h.
- FIG. 14 shows the timing of scanning of the selection signals and the timing of turning off of the backlight in the monochrome still image display period 303 in the above-described liquid crystal display device. Note that in FIG. 14 , the vertical axis represents the row in the pixel portion, and the horizontal axis represents time.
- the selection signals are supplied sequentially to the scan lines GL1 to GL3j in the monochrome still image display period 303 in the liquid crystal display device described in this embodiment.
- FIG. 15A illustrates another configuration example of the pulse output circuit.
- the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 15A includes a transistor 50 in addition to the configuration of the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 8A .
- a first terminal of the transistor 50 is connected to the node supplied with the high power supply potential.
- a second terminal of the transistor 50 is connected to the gate electrode of the transistor 32 , the gate electrode of the transistor 34 , and the gate electrode of the transistor 39 .
- a gate electrode of the transistor 50 is connected to a reset terminal (Reset).
- a high-level potential is input to the reset terminal in a period which follows the round of switching of hues of the backlight in the pixel portion; a low-level potential is input in the other periods. Note that the transistor 50 is turned on when a high-level potential is input. Thus, the potential of each node can be initialized in the period after the backlight is turned on, so that malfunction can be prevented.
- the initialization it is necessary to provide an initialization period between periods in each of which an image is formed in the pixel portion.
- the initialization can be performed in the period in which the backlight is off.
- FIG. 15B illustrates another configuration example of the pulse output circuit.
- the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 15B includes a transistor 51 in addition to the configuration of the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 8A .
- a first terminal of the transistor 51 is connected to the second terminal of the transistor 31 and the second terminal of the transistor 32 .
- a second terminal of the transistor 51 is connected to the gate electrode of the transistor 33 and the gate electrode of the transistor 38 .
- a gate electrode of the transistor 51 is connected to the node supplied with the high power supply potential.
- the transistor 51 is off in the periods t 1 to t 6 shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C . Therefore, with the configuration including the transistor 51 , the gate electrode of the transistor 33 and the gate electrode of the transistor 38 can be disconnected to the second terminal of the transistor 31 and the second terminal of the transistor 32 in the periods t 1 to t 6 . Thus, a load at the time of the bootstrapping in the pulse output circuit can be reduced in the periods t 1 to t 6 .
- FIG. 16A illustrates another configuration example of the pulse output circuit.
- the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 16A includes a transistor 52 in addition to the configuration of the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 15B .
- a first terminal of the transistor 52 is connected to the gate electrode of the transistor 33 and the second terminal of the transistor 51 .
- a second terminal of the transistor 52 is connected to the gate electrode of the transistor 38 .
- a gate electrode of the transistor 52 is connected to the node supplied with the high power supply potential.
- a load at the time of the bootstrapping in the pulse output circuit can be reduced with the transistor 52 .
- the effect of reducing the load is enhanced in the case where the potential of a node connected to the gate electrode of the transistor 33 is increased simply by capacitive coupling of the source electrode and the gate electrode of the transistor 33 in the pulse output circuit.
- FIG. 16B illustrates another configuration example of the pulse output circuit.
- the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 16B includes a transistor 53 in addition to the configuration of the pulse output circuit illustrated in FIG. 16A and does not include the transistor 51 .
- a first terminal of the transistor 53 is connected to the second terminal of the transistor 31 , the second terminal of the transistor 32 , and the first terminal of the transistor 52 .
- a second terminal of the transistor 53 is connected to the gate electrode of the transistor 33 .
- a gate electrode of the transistor 53 is connected to the node supplied with the high power supply potential.
- the liquid crystal display device performs color image display in such a manner that the pixel portion is divided into a plurality of regions and lights having different hues are sequentially supplied per region. At each time, the hues of the lights supplied to the adjacent regions can be different from each other. Accordingly, the images of different colors can be prevented from being perceived separately without being synthesized, and a color break, which is likely to occur when a moving image is displayed, can be prevented.
- a frequency at which the light sources are switched needs be higher than a frame frequency in the case of using a single-color light source.
- the frame frequency in the case of using the single-color light source is 60 Hz
- the frequency at which the light sources are switched is about three times as high as the frame frequency, i.e., 180 Hz.
- the driver circuits which are operated in accordance with the frequency of the light sources, are operated at an extremely high frequency. Therefore, power consumption in the driver circuits tends to be higher than in the case of using the combination of the single-color light source and the color filter.
- the transistor whose off-state current is extremely low is used, whereby the period in which a voltage applied to the liquid crystal element is held can be longer. Therefore, the driving frequency of a still image display can be lower than that of moving image display. Accordingly, it is possible to obtain a liquid crystal display device whose power consumption is reduced.
- an insulating film 701 is formed over an insulating surface of a substrate 700 , and a gate electrode 702 is formed over the insulating film 701 .
- a substrate which can be used as the substrate 700 as long as it has a light-transmitting property, it is necessary that the substrate have at least enough heat resistance to heat treatment performed later.
- a glass substrate manufactured by a fusion method or a float method, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, or the like can be used as the substrate 700 .
- a glass substrate whose strain point is higher than or equal to 730° C. is preferably used.
- a substrate formed of a flexible synthetic resin such as plastic generally has a lower resistance temperature than the aforementioned substrates, it may be used as long as being resistant to a processing temperature during manufacturing steps.
- the insulating film 701 is formed using a material which can withstand a temperature of heat treatment in a later manufacturing step.
- the insulating film 701 serves as a base layer.
- the insulating film 701 have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using one or more of insulating layers selected from a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer, a silicon nitride oxide layer, a silicon oxynitride layer, an aluminum nitride layer, an aluminum oxide layer, an aluminum oxynitride layer, an aluminum nitride oxide layer, a gallium oxide layer, and the like. With the use of any of the above materials, diffusion of an impurity element from the substrate 700 can be prevented.
- a function of preventing diffusion of an impurity element from the substrate 700 can be further improved.
- concentration of a halogen element to be contained in the base layer is measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS) and its peak is preferably greater than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 15 /cm 3 and less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 20 /cm 3 .
- Gallium oxide may be used for the base layer.
- a stacked-layer structure of a gallium oxide layer and the above insulating layer may be used for the base layer.
- Gallium oxide is a material which is hardly charged; therefore, variation in threshold voltage due to charge buildup of the insulating layer can be suppressed.
- an oxynitride denotes a material in which the amount of oxygen is larger than that of nitrogen
- a nitride oxide denotes a material in which the amount of nitrogen is larger than that of oxygen.
- the gate electrode 702 can be formed with a single layer or a stacked layer using one or more of conductive films including a metal material such as molybdenum (Mo), titanium (Ti), chromium (Cr), tantalum (Ta), tungsten (W), neodymium (Nd), scandium (Sc), or magnesium (Mg), or an alloy material which includes any of these metal materials as a main component, or a nitride of these metals.
- a metal material such as molybdenum (Mo), titanium (Ti), chromium (Cr), tantalum (Ta), tungsten (W), neodymium (Nd), scandium (Sc), or magnesium (Mg), or an alloy material which includes any of these metal materials as a main component, or a nitride of these metals.
- a metal material such as molybdenum (Mo), titanium (Ti), chromium (Cr), tantalum (Ta),
- Aluminum or copper is preferably combined with a refractory metal material so as to prevent a heat resistance problem and a corrosive problem.
- a refractory metal material molybdenum, titanium, chromium, tantalum, tungsten, neodymium, scandium, or the like can be used.
- the thickness of the gate electrode 702 is in the range of 10 nm to 400 nm, preferably 100 nm to 200 nm.
- the conductive film is processed (patterned) into a desired shape by etching, whereby the gate electrode 702 is formed. Note that when end portions of the formed gate electrode are tapered, coverage with a gate insulating film stacked thereover is improved, which is preferable.
- a resist mask may be formed by an inkjet method. Formation of the resist mask by an inkjet method needs no photomask; thus, manufacturing cost can be reduced.
- a gate insulating film 703 is formed over the gate electrode 702 , and an island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 is formed over the gate insulating film 703 in a position overlapping with the gate electrode 702 .
- the gate insulating film 703 can be formed with a single layer or a stacked layer using silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum oxide, aluminum nitride, aluminum oxynitride, aluminum nitride oxide, tantalum oxide, gallium oxide, lanthanum oxide, cesium oxide, magnesium oxide, yttrium oxide, hafnium oxide, hafnium silicate (HfSi x O y (x>0, y>0)), hafnium silicate to which nitrogen is added (HfSi x O y N z (x>0, y>0, z>0)), hafnium aluminate to which nitrogen is added (HfAl x O y N z (x>0, y>0, z>0)), or the like.
- a plasma CVD method, a sputtering method, or the like can be employed. It is preferable that the gate insulating film 703 contain an impurity such as moisture or hydrogen as little as possible.
- a silicon oxide film is formed by a sputtering method, a silicon target or a quartz target is used as a target and oxygen or a mixed gas of oxygen and argon is used as a sputtering gas.
- An oxide semiconductor which is made to be an i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor by reduction of oxygen deficiency is extremely sensitive to an interface state. Therefore, the interface between the oxide semiconductor and the gate insulating film 703 is important. Thus, higher quality is demanded for the gate insulating film (GI) in contact with the oxide semiconductor.
- GI gate insulating film
- a high-density plasma enhanced CVD using a microwave (frequency: 2.45 GHz) is preferably used, in which case an insulating film which is dense, has high withstand voltage, and is of high quality can be formed.
- the oxide semiconductor and the high-quality gate insulating film are in close contact with each other, the interface state density can be reduced and favorable interface characteristics can be obtained.
- any insulating film that has a reduced interface state density between a gate insulating film and the oxide semiconductor and can form a favorable interface as well as having a favorable film quality as the gate insulating film can be used.
- the gate insulating film 703 having a structure in which an aluminum oxide film having a thickness of 100 nm formed by a sputtering method is stacked over a silicon nitride film having a thickness of 50 nm formed by a sputtering method is formed.
- the thickness of the gate insulating film 703 may be set as appropriate depending on characteristics needed for the transistor and may be about 350 nm to 400 nm.
- the gate insulating film 703 is in contact with the oxide semiconductor to be formed later.
- the gate insulating film 703 do not contain hydrogen, a hydroxyl group, and moisture.
- an impurity adsorbed on the substrate 700 such as moisture or hydrogen, be eliminated and removed by preheating the substrate 700 , over which the gate electrode 702 is formed, in a preheating chamber of a sputtering apparatus, as a pretreatment for film formation.
- the temperature for the preheating is higher than or equal to 100° C.
- a cryopump is preferable. Note that this preheating treatment can be omitted.
- the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film can be formed by processing an oxide semiconductor film formed over the gate insulating film 703 into a desired shape.
- the thickness of the oxide semiconductor film is greater than or equal to 2 nm and less than or equal to 200 nm, preferably greater than or equal to 3 nm and less than or equal to 50 nm, further preferably greater than or equal to 3 nm and less than or equal to 20 nm.
- the oxide semiconductor film is formed by a sputtering method using an oxide semiconductor target.
- the oxide semiconductor film can be formed by a sputtering method under a rare gas (e.g., argon) atmosphere, an oxygen atmosphere, or a mixed atmosphere of a rare gas (e.g., argon) and oxygen.
- an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor thin film with a thickness of 30 nm which is obtained by a sputtering method using a metal oxide target including indium (In), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn), is used.
- an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor can be referred to as IGZO.
- An In—Sn—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor can be referred to as ITZO.
- the relative density of the metal oxide target is greater than or equal to 90% and less than or equal to 100%, preferably greater than or equal to 95% and less than 100%.
- the oxide semiconductor film is formed over the substrate 700 in such a manner that the substrate is placed in a treatment chamber kept at reduced pressure, a sputtering gas from which hydrogen and moisture have been removed is introduced into the treatment chamber while remaining moisture therein is removed, and the above target is used.
- a sputtering gas from which hydrogen and moisture have been removed is introduced into the treatment chamber while remaining moisture therein is removed, and the above target is used.
- the purity be 9N
- the dew point be ⁇ 121° C.
- the content of H 2 O be 0.1 ppb or less
- the content of H 2 be 0.5 ppb or less.
- the purity be 8N
- the dew point be ⁇ 112° C.
- the content of H 2 O be 1 ppb or less
- the content of H 2 be 1 ppb or less.
- the substrate temperature in film formation may be higher than or equal to 100° C. and lower than or equal to 600° C., preferably higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C.
- the concentration of an impurity contained in the formed oxide semiconductor film can be reduced.
- damage by sputtering can be reduced.
- an entrapment vacuum pump is preferably used.
- a cryopump, an ion pump, or a titanium sublimation pump is preferably used.
- the evacuation unit may be a turbo pump provided with a cold trap.
- a hydrogen atom, a compound containing a hydrogen atom, such as water (H 2 O), (more preferably, also a compound containing a carbon atom), and the like are removed, whereby the concentration of an impurity contained in the oxide semiconductor film formed in the deposition chamber can be reduced.
- deposition conditions is as follows: the distance between the substrate and the target is 100 mm, the pressure is 0.6 Pa, the electric power of the direct-current (DC) power source is 0.5 kW, and oxygen (the flow rate of oxygen is 100%) is used as a sputtering gas.
- DC direct-current
- oxygen the flow rate of oxygen is 100%
- a pulsed direct-current (DC) power source is preferable because dust generated in deposition can be reduced and the film thickness can be made uniform.
- the oxide semiconductor film contains as little hydrogen, a hydroxyl group, and moisture as possible, it is preferable that an impurity adsorbed on the substrate 700 , such as moisture or hydrogen, be eliminated and removed by preheating the substrate 700 , over which films up to and including the gate insulating film 703 are formed, in a preheating chamber of a sputtering apparatus, as a pretreatment for film formation.
- the temperature for the preheating is higher than or equal to 100° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C., preferably higher than or equal to 150° C. and lower than or equal to 300° C.
- a cryopump is preferably provided for the preheating chamber. Note that this preheating treatment can be omitted. This preheating may be similarly performed on the substrate 700 over which films up to and including a conductive film 705 and a conductive film 706 are formed, before the formation of an insulating film 707 which will be formed later.
- the concentration of an alkali metal such as Na or Li in the oxide semiconductor film is preferably less than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 , further preferably less than or equal to 2 ⁇ 10 16 atoms/cm 3 .
- etching for forming the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 may be wet etching, dry etching, or both dry etching and wet etching.
- a gas containing chlorine chlorine-based gas such as chlorine (Cl 2 ), boron trichloride (BCl 3 ), silicon tetrachloride (SiCl 4 ), or carbon tetrachloride (CCl 4 ) is preferably used.
- a gas containing fluorine fluorine-based gas such as carbon tetrafluoride (CF 4 ), sulfur hexafluoride (SF 6 ), nitrogen trifluoride (NF 3 ), or trifluoromethane (CHF 3 )); hydrogen bromide (HBr); oxygen (O 2 ); any of these gases to which a rare gas such as helium (He) or argon (Ar) is added; or the like can be used.
- fluorine-based gas such as carbon tetrafluoride (CF 4 ), sulfur hexafluoride (SF 6 ), nitrogen trifluoride (NF 3 ), or trifluoromethane (CHF 3 )
- hydrogen bromide HBr
- oxygen O 2
- any of these gases to which a rare gas such as helium (He) or argon (Ar) is added; or the like can be used.
- a parallel plate RIE (reactive ion etching) method or an ICP (inductively coupled plasma) etching method can be used.
- the etching condition the amount of electric power applied to a coil-shaped electrode, the amount of electric power applied to an electrode on a substrate side, the temperature of the electrode on the substrate side, or the like.
- ITO-07N produced by KANTO CHEMICAL CO., INC.
- KANTO CHEMICAL CO., INC. may be used as an etchant used for wet etching.
- a resist mask for forming the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 may be formed by an inkjet method. Formation of the resist mask by an inkjet method needs no photomask; thus, manufacturing cost can be reduced.
- the oxide semiconductor film formed by sputtering or the like contains a large amount of moisture or hydrogen (including a hydroxyl group) as an impurity in some cases. Moisture or hydrogen easily forms a donor level and thus serves as an impurity in the oxide semiconductor.
- the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 in order to reduce an impurity such as moisture or hydrogen in the oxide semiconductor film (dehydration or dehydrogenation), the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 is subjected to heat treatment in a reduced-pressure atmosphere, an inert gas atmosphere of nitrogen, a rare gas, or the like, an oxygen gas atmosphere, or an ultra dry air atmosphere (the moisture amount is 20 ppm ( ⁇ 55° C.
- a dew point preferably 1 ppm or less, further preferably 10 ppb or less, in the case where the measurement is performed by a dew point meter in a cavity ring down laser spectroscopy (CRDS) method).
- CRDS cavity ring down laser spectroscopy
- heat treatment may be performed at a temperature higher than or equal to 250° C. and lower than or equal to 750° C., preferably higher than or equal to 400° C. and lower than the strain point of a substrate.
- heat treatment may be performed at 500° C. for approximately more than or equal to 3 minutes and less than or equal to 6 minutes.
- an RTA method is used for the heat treatment, dehydration or dehydrogenation can be performed in a short time; therefore, treatment can be performed even at a temperature higher than the strain point of a glass substrate.
- an electrical furnace that is one of heat treatment apparatuses is used.
- a heat treatment apparatus is not limited to an electrical furnace, and may include a device for heating an object to be processed by heat conduction or heat radiation from a heating element such as a resistance heating element.
- a heating element such as a resistance heating element.
- an RTA (rapid thermal anneal) apparatus such as a GRTA (gas rapid thermal anneal) apparatus or an LRTA (lamp rapid thermal anneal) apparatus can be used.
- An LRTA apparatus is an apparatus for heating an object to be processed by radiation of light (an electromagnetic wave) emitted from a lamp such as a halogen lamp, a metal halide lamp, a xenon arc lamp, a carbon arc lamp, a high pressure sodium lamp, or a high pressure mercury lamp.
- a GRTA apparatus is an apparatus for heat treatment using a high-temperature gas.
- the gas an inert gas which does not react with an object to be processed by heat treatment, such as nitrogen or a rare gas such as argon is used.
- the purity of nitrogen or the rare gas such as helium, neon, or argon which is introduced into a heat treatment apparatus is set to be 6N (99.9999%) or higher, preferably 7N (99.99999%) or higher (that is, the impurity concentration is 1 ppm or lower, preferably 0.1 ppm or lower).
- the concentration of hydrogen in the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 can be reduced and the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 can be purified.
- the transistor can be manufactured using a large-sized substrate, so that the productivity can be increased.
- the above heat treatment can be performed at any time after the oxide semiconductor film is formed.
- the oxide semiconductor film is heated, although depending on a material of the oxide semiconductor film or heating conditions, plate-shaped crystals are formed at the surface of the oxide semiconductor film in some cases.
- the plate-shaped crystal is preferably a single crystal which is c-axis-aligned in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the oxide semiconductor film.
- the surface of the base is preferably as even as possible.
- the surface of the base may have an average surface roughness (Ra) of 1 nm or less, preferably 0.3 nm or less, further preferably 0.1 nm or less. Ra can be measured using an atomic force microscope (AFM).
- AFM atomic force microscope
- the conductive film 705 and the conductive film 706 functioning as a source electrode and a drain electrode are formed, and an insulating film 707 is formed over the conductive film 705 , the conductive film 706 , and the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 .
- the conductive film 705 and the conductive film 706 are formed in the following manner: a conductive film is formed to cover the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 by a sputtering method or a vacuum evaporation method, and then the conductive film is patterned by etching or the like.
- the conductive film 705 and the conductive film 706 are in contact with the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 .
- a material of the conductive film for forming the conductive film 705 and the conductive film 706 any of the following materials can be used: an element selected from aluminum, chromium, copper, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, or tungsten; an alloy including any of these elements; an alloy film including the above elements in combination; or the like.
- a structure may be employed in which a film of a refractory metal such as chromium, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, or tungsten is stacked over or below a metal film of aluminum or copper.
- Aluminum or copper is preferably combined with a refractory metal material so as to prevent a heat resistance problem and a corrosion problem.
- a refractory metal material molybdenum, titanium, chromium, tantalum, tungsten, neodymium, scandium, yttrium, or the like can be used.
- the conductive film may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure of two or more layers.
- a single-layer structure of an aluminum film containing silicon; a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is stacked over an aluminum film; a three-layer structure in which a titanium film, an aluminum film, and a titanium film are stacked in this order; and the like can be given.
- a conductive metal oxide may be used for the conductive film for forming the conductive film 705 and the conductive film 706 .
- a conductive metal oxide indium oxide, tin oxide, zinc oxide, an alloy of indium oxide and tin oxide, an alloy of indium oxide and zinc oxide, or the metal oxide material containing silicon or silicon oxide can be used.
- the conductive film preferably has heat resistance enough to withstand the heat treatment.
- the material and etching conditions are adjusted as appropriate so that the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 is not removed in etching of the conductive film as much as possible. Depending on the etching conditions, there are some cases in which an exposed portion of the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 is partly etched and thereby a groove (a depression portion) is formed.
- a titanium film is used for the conductive film. Therefore, wet etching can be selectively performed on the conductive film using a solution (ammonia hydrogen peroxide mixture) containing ammonia and hydrogen peroxide water; however, the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 is partly etched in some cases.
- a solution ammonia hydrogen peroxide mixture
- an aqueous solution in which oxygenated water of 31 wt %, ammonia water of 28 wt %, and water are mixed at a volume ratio of 2:1:1 is used.
- dry etching may be performed on the conductive film with the use of a gas containing chlorine (Cl 2 ), boron trichloride (BCl 3 ), or the like.
- etching may be performed with the use of a resist mask formed using a multi-tone mask through which light is transmitted so as to have a plurality of intensities.
- a resist mask formed with the use of a multi-tone mask has a plurality of thicknesses and further can be changed in shape by etching; therefore, the resist mask can be used in a plurality of etching steps for processing into different patterns. Therefore, a resist mask corresponding to at least two kinds or more of different patterns can be formed by one multi-tone mask.
- the number of light-exposure masks can be reduced and the number of corresponding photolithography steps can be also reduced, whereby simplification of a process can be realized.
- the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 is subjected to plasma treatment with the use of a gas such as N 2 O, N 2 , or Ar.
- a gas such as N 2 O, N 2 , or Ar.
- plasma treatment adsorbed water or the like attached to an exposed surface of the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 is removed.
- Plasma treatment may be performed using a mixture gas of oxygen and argon as well.
- the insulating film 707 preferably contains an impurity such as moisture or hydrogen as little as possible.
- An insulating film of a single layer or a plurality of insulating films stacked may be employed for the insulating film 707 .
- hydrogen is contained in the insulating film 707 , entry of the hydrogen to the oxide semiconductor film or extraction of oxygen from the oxide semiconductor film by the hydrogen occurs, whereby a back channel portion of the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 has lower resistance (n-type conductivity); thus, a parasitic channel might be formed. Therefore, it is important that a film formation method in which hydrogen is not used be employed in order to form the insulating film 707 containing as little hydrogen as possible.
- a material having a high barrier property is preferably used for the insulating film 707 .
- a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum nitride film, an aluminum nitride oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a gallium oxide film, or the like can be used as the insulating film having a high barrier property.
- an impurity such as moisture or hydrogen can be prevented from entering the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 , the gate insulating film 703 , or the interface between the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 and another insulating film and the vicinity thereof.
- the insulating film 707 having a structure in which an aluminum oxide film with a thickness of 100 nm formed by a sputtering method is stacked over a gallium oxide film with a thickness of 200 nm formed by a sputtering method is formed.
- the substrate temperature in film formation may be higher than or equal to room temperature and lower than or equal to 300° C. and in this embodiment, is 100° C.
- the insulating film in contact with the oxide semiconductor preferably contains much oxygen that exceeds the stoichiometric proportion, preferably at a proportion greater than 1 time and less than twice of the stoichiometric proportion.
- heat treatment may be performed.
- the heat treatment is performed in a nitrogen atmosphere, an atmosphere of ultra-dry air, or a rare gas (e.g., argon, helium) atmosphere preferably at a temperature higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C., for example, higher than or equal to 250° C. and lower than or equal to 350° C. It is desirable that the content of water in the gas be 20 ppm or less, preferably 1 ppm or less, further preferably 10 ppb or less. In this embodiment, for example, heat treatment is performed at 250° C. for one hour under a nitrogen atmosphere.
- RTA treatment for a short time at a high temperature may be performed before the formation of the conductive film 705 and the conductive film 706 in a manner similar to that of the previous heat treatment performed on the oxide semiconductor film for reduction of moisture or hydrogen.
- oxygen deficiency is generated in the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 by the previous heat treatment
- oxygen is supplied to the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 from the insulating film including an oxygen excess region by performing heat treatment after the insulating film including an oxygen excess region is provided in contact with the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 .
- oxygen deficiency that serves as a donor is reduced in the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 and the stoichiometric proportion can be satisfied.
- the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 preferably contains oxygen whose amount is greater than that in the stoichiometric proportion.
- the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 can be made to be i-type or substantially i-type and variation in electric characteristics of the transistor due to oxygen deficiency can be reduced; thus, electric characteristics can be improved.
- the timing of this heat treatment is not particularly limited as long as it is after the formation of the insulating film 707 .
- this heat treatment doubles as another step such as heat treatment for formation of a resin film or heat treatment for reduction of the resistance of a light-transmitting conductive film, the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 can be made to be i-type or substantially i-type without the number of steps increased.
- the oxygen deficiency that serves as a donor in the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 may be reduced by subjecting the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 to heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere so that oxygen is added to the oxide semiconductor.
- the heat treatment is performed at a temperature of, for example, higher than or equal to 100° C. and lower than 350° C., preferably higher than or equal to 150° C. and lower than 250° C. It is preferable that an oxygen gas used for the heat treatment under an oxygen atmosphere do not include water, hydrogen, or the like.
- the purity of the oxygen gas which is introduced into the heat treatment apparatus is preferably 6N (99.9999%) or higher, further preferably 7N (99.99999%) or higher (that is, the impurity concentration in the oxygen is 1 ppm or lower, preferably 0.1 ppm or lower).
- oxygen may be added to the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 by an ion implantation method, an ion doping method, or the like to reduce oxygen deficiency serving as a donor.
- oxygen which is made into a plasma state by a microwave at 2.45 GHz may be added to the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 .
- a back gate electrode may be formed in a position overlapping with the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 by forming a conductive film over the insulating film 707 and then patterning the conductive film.
- an insulating film is preferably formed to cover the back gate electrode.
- the back gate electrode can be formed using a material and a structure similar to those of the gate electrode 702 or the conductive films 705 and 706 .
- the thickness of the back gate electrode is set to be 10 nm to 400 nm, preferably 100 nm to 200 nm.
- the back gate electrode may be formed in a such a manner that a conductive film in which a titanium film, an aluminum film, and a titanium film are stacked is formed, a resist mask is formed by a photolithography method or the like, and unnecessary portions are removed by etching so that the conductive film is processed (patterned) to a desired shape.
- the back gate electrode also functions as a light-blocking film, whereby photodegradation of the transistor such as negative-bias temperature stress photodegradation can be reduced and the reliability can be increased.
- a transistor 708 is formed.
- the transistor 708 includes the gate electrode 702 , the gate insulating film 703 over the gate electrode 702 , the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 which is over the gate insulating film 703 and overlaps with the gate electrode 702 , and a pair of the conductive film 705 and the conductive film 706 formed over the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 . Further, the transistor 708 may include the insulating film 707 as its constituent.
- the transistor 708 illustrated in FIG. 17C has a channel-etched structure in which part of the island-shaped oxide semiconductor film 704 between the conductive film 705 and the conductive film 706 is etched.
- the transistor 708 is described as a single-gate transistor, a multi-gate transistor including a plurality of channel formation regions can be manufactured as needed.
- the multi-gate transistor includes a plurality of the gate electrodes 702 electrically connected to each other.
- This embodiment can be implemented in combination with other embodiments as appropriate.
- a transistor 2450 illustrated in FIG. 18A includes a gate electrode 2401 over a substrate 2400 , a gate insulating film 2402 over the gate electrode 2401 , an oxide semiconductor layer 2403 over the gate insulating film 2402 , and a source electrode 2405 a and a drain electrode 2405 b over the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 .
- An insulating film 2407 is formed over the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 , the source electrode 2405 a , and the drain electrode 2405 b .
- a protective insulating film 2409 may be formed over the insulating film 2407 .
- the transistor 2450 is a bottom-gate transistor, and is also an inverted staggered transistor.
- a transistor 2460 illustrated in FIG. 18B includes the gate electrode 2401 over the substrate 2400 , the gate insulating film 2402 over the gate electrode 2401 , the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 over the gate insulating film 2402 , a channel protective layer 2406 over the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 , and the source electrode 2405 a and the drain electrode 2405 b over the channel protective layer 2406 and the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 .
- the protective insulating film 2409 may be formed over the source electrode 2405 a and the drain electrode 2405 b .
- the transistor 2460 is a bottom-gate transistor called a channel-protective type (also referred to as a channel-stop type) transistor and is also an inverted staggered transistor.
- the channel protective layer 2406 can be formed using a material and a method similar to those of any other insulating film.
- a transistor 2470 illustrated in FIG. 18C includes a base film 2436 over the substrate 2400 , the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 over the base film 2436 , a source electrode 2405 a and a drain electrode 2405 b over the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the base film 2436 , the gate insulating film 2402 over the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 , the source electrode 2405 a , and the drain electrode 2405 b , and the gate electrode 2401 over the gate insulating film 2402 .
- the protective insulating film 2409 may be formed over the gate electrode 2401 .
- the transistor 2470 is a top-gate transistor.
- a transistor 2480 illustrated in FIG. 18D includes a first gate electrode 2411 over the substrate 2400 , a first gate insulating film 2413 over the first gate electrode 2411 , the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 over the first gate insulating film 2413 , and the source electrode 2405 a and the drain electrode 2405 b over the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the first gate insulating film 2413 .
- a second gate insulating film 2414 is formed over the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 , the source electrode 2405 a , and the drain electrode 2405 b , and a second gate electrode 2412 is formed over the second gate insulating film 2414 .
- the protective insulating film 2409 may be formed over the second gate electrode 2412 .
- the transistor 2480 has a structure combining the transistor 2450 and the transistor 2470 .
- the first gate electrode 2411 and the second gate electrode 2412 can be electrically connected to each other, so that they function as one gate electrode.
- Either the first gate electrode 2411 or the second gate electrode 2412 may be simply referred to as a gate electrode and the other may be referred to as a back gate electrode.
- a transistor 2550 illustrated in FIG. 19A includes the gate electrode 2401 over the substrate 2400 , the gate insulating film 2402 over the gate electrode 2401 , the source electrode 2405 a and the drain electrode 2405 b over the gate insulating film 2402 , and the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 over the gate insulating film 2402 , the source electrode 2405 a , and the drain electrode 2405 b .
- the insulating film 2407 is formed over the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 , the source electrode 2405 a , and the drain electrode 2405 b .
- the protective insulating film 2409 may be formed over the insulating film 2407 .
- the transistor 2550 is a bottom-gate transistor and is also an inverted staggered transistor.
- a transistor 2560 illustrated in FIG. 19B includes the base film 2436 over the substrate 2400 , the source electrode 2405 a and the drain electrode 2405 b over the base film 2436 , the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 over the base film 2436 , the source electrode 2405 a , and the drain electrode 2405 b , the gate insulating film 2402 over the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 , the source electrode 2405 a , and the drain electrode 2405 b , and the gate electrode 2401 over the gate insulating film 2402 .
- the protective insulating film 2409 may be formed over the gate electrode 2401 .
- the transistor 2560 is a top-gate transistor.
- a transistor 2570 illustrated in FIG. 19C includes the first gate electrode 2411 over the substrate 2400 , the first gate insulating film 2413 over the first gate electrode 2411 , the source electrode 2405 a and the drain electrode 2405 b over the first gate insulating film 2413 , the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 over the first gate insulating film 2413 , the source electrode 2405 a , and the drain electrode 2405 b , the second gate insulating film 2414 over the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 , the source electrode 2405 a , and the drain electrode 2405 b , and the second gate electrode 2412 over the second gate insulating film 2414 .
- the protective insulating film 2409 may be formed over the second gate electrode 2412 .
- the transistor 2570 has a structure combining the transistor 2550 and the transistor 2560 .
- the first gate electrode 2411 and the second gate electrode 2412 can be electrically connected to each other, so that they function as one gate electrode.
- Either the first gate electrode 2411 or the second gate electrode 2412 may be simply referred to as a gate electrode and the other may be referred to as a back gate electrode.
- the threshold voltage of the transistor can be changed.
- the back gate electrode is formed so as to overlap with a channel formation region in the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 .
- the back gate electrode may be electrically insulated and in a floating state, or may be in a state where the back gate electrode is supplied with a potential. In the latter case, the back gate electrode may be supplied with a potential at the same level as that of the gate electrode, or may be supplied with a fixed potential such as a ground potential.
- the level of the potential applied to the back gate electrode is controlled, so that the threshold voltage of the transistor 2480 or the transistor 2570 can be controlled.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 When the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 is covered with the back gate electrode, light from the back gate electrode side can be prevented from entering the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 . Therefore, photodegradation of the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 can be prevented and deterioration in characteristics such as a shift of the threshold voltage of the transistor can be prevented.
- An insulating film in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 is preferably formed of an insulating material containing a Group 13 element and oxygen.
- an insulating material containing a Group 13 element works well with an oxide semiconductor.
- An insulating material containing a Group 13 element refers to an insulating material containing one or more Group 13 elements.
- a gallium oxide, an aluminum oxide, an aluminum gallium oxide, a gallium aluminum oxide, and the like are given.
- aluminum gallium oxide refers to a material in which the amount of aluminum is larger than that of gallium in atomic percent
- gallium aluminum oxide refers to a material in which the amount of gallium is larger than or equal to that of aluminum in atomic percent.
- a material containing gallium oxide may be used for the insulating film, so that favorable characteristics can be kept at the interface between the oxide semiconductor film and the insulating film.
- pileup of hydrogen at the interface between the oxide semiconductor film and the insulating film can be reduced, for example.
- aluminum oxide has a property of not easily transmitting water.
- the insulating material of the insulating film in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 is preferably made to include a region containing oxygen in a proportion higher than that in the stoichiometric composition (an oxygen excess region) by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping.
- Oxygen doping refers to addition of oxygen into a bulk. Note that the term “bulk” is used in order to clarify that oxygen is added not only to a surface of a thin film but also to the inside of the thin film.
- oxygen doping includes “oxygen plasma doping” in which oxygen which is made to be plasma is added to a bulk. The oxygen doping may be performed using an ion implantation method or an ion doping method.
- the composition of gallium aluminum oxide (aluminum gallium oxide) can be set to be Ga x Al 2 ⁇ x O 3+ ⁇ (0 ⁇ x ⁇ 2, 0 ⁇ 1) by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping.
- the oxide semiconductor film can be an i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor.
- the insulating film including an oxygen excess region may be applied to either the insulating film located on the upper side of the oxide semiconductor layer or the insulating film located on the lower side of the oxide semiconductor layer of the insulating films in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 ; however, it is preferable to apply such an insulating film to both of the insulating films in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 .
- the above-described effect can be enhanced with a structure where the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 is sandwiched between the insulating films each including a region containing oxygen with a higher proportion than that in the stoichiometric composition, which are used as the insulating films in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and placed on the upper side and the lower side of the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 .
- the insulating films on the upper side and the lower side of the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 may contain the same constituent element or different constituent elements.
- the insulating film in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 may be formed by stacking insulating films which each include an oxygen excess region.
- Oxide conductive layers functioning as a source region and a drain region may be provided between the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the source and drain electrodes 2405 a and 2405 b , as buffer layers.
- FIGS. 28A and 28B illustrate transistors 2471 and 2472 , respectively, each having a structure in which the transistor 2470 in FIG. 18C further includes oxide conductive layers.
- the transistors 2471 and 2472 in FIGS. 28A and 28B each include oxide conductive layers 2404 a and 2404 b functioning as a source region and a drain region between the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the source and drain electrodes 2405 a and 2405 b .
- the transistors 2471 and 2472 in FIGS. 28A and 28B are examples where the oxide conductive layers 2404 a and 2404 b have different shapes depending on a manufacturing process.
- an oxide semiconductor film and an oxide conductive film are stacked and processed by the same photolithography step, so that the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 having an island shape and an oxide conductive film having an island shape are formed.
- the island-shaped oxide conductive film is etched with the use of the source electrode 2405 a and the drain electrode 2405 b as masks, so that the oxide conductive layers 2404 a and 2404 b serving as a source region and a drain region are formed.
- an oxide conductive film is formed over the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 , a metal conductive film is formed thereover, and the oxide conductive film and the metal conductive film are processed by the same photolithography step, so that the oxide conductive layers 2404 a and 2404 b serving as a source region and a drain region and the source and drain electrodes 2405 a and 2405 b are formed.
- etching conditions (such as the kind of the etchant, the concentration, and the etching time) are adjusted as appropriate so that the oxide semiconductor layer is not etched excessively.
- the oxide conductive layers 2404 a and 2404 b As a formation method of the oxide conductive layers 2404 a and 2404 b , a sputtering method, a vacuum evaporation method (such as an electron beam evaporation method), an arc discharge ion plating method, or a spray method is used.
- a material of the oxide conductive layers zinc oxide, zinc aluminum oxide, zinc aluminum oxynitride, zinc gallium oxide, indium tin oxide, or the like can be used. In addition, the above materials may contain silicon oxide.
- oxide conductive layers are provided between the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the source and drain electrodes 2405 a and 2405 b , as a source region and a drain region, contact resistance can be reduced than in the case where the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the source and drain electrodes 2405 a and 2405 b are in direct contact with each other, so that the transistors 2471 and 2472 can operate at high speed.
- a structure including the oxide conductive layers 2404 a and 2404 b between the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the source and drain electrodes 2405 a and 2405 b can improve the withstand voltage of the transistors 2471 and 2472 .
- any of the above-described insulating films having barrier properties may be used as the protective insulating film, so that elimination of oxygen from the oxide semiconductor layer can be prevented.
- the insulating film having a barrier property an aluminum oxide film can be given.
- This embodiment can be implemented in combination with other embodiments as appropriate.
- FIGS. 29A to 29C one embodiment of an oxide semiconductor layer which can be used as the semiconductor layers of the transistors disclosed in this specification will be described with reference to FIGS. 29A to 29C .
- the oxide semiconductor layer of this embodiment has a structure including a first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and a second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer which is stacked over the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and has a larger thickness than the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer.
- An insulating layer 437 is formed over a substrate 2400 .
- an oxide insulating layer with a thickness greater than or equal to 50 nm and less than or equal to 600 nm is formed as the insulating layer 437 by a PCVD method or a sputtering method.
- a single layer selected from a silicon oxide film, a gallium oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxynitride film, and a silicon nitride oxide film or a stack of any of these films can be used.
- a first oxide semiconductor film with a thickness greater than or equal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 10 nm is formed over the insulating layer 437 .
- the first oxide semiconductor film is formed by a sputtering method, and the substrate temperature in the film formation by a sputtering method is set to be higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C.
- the first oxide semiconductor film is formed to a thickness of 5 nm in an oxygen atmosphere, an argon atmosphere, or an atmosphere including argon and oxygen under conditions where a metal oxide target for an oxide semiconductor (a target for an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor including In 2 O 3 , Ga 2 O 3 , and ZnO at 1:1:2 [molar ratio]) is used, the distance between the substrate and the target is 170 mm, the substrate temperature is 250° C., the pressure is 0.4 Pa, and the electric power of the direct current (DC) power source is 0.5 kW.
- a metal oxide target for an oxide semiconductor a target for an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor including In 2 O 3 , Ga 2 O 3 , and ZnO at 1:1:2 [molar ratio]
- the distance between the substrate and the target is 170 mm
- the substrate temperature is 250° C.
- the pressure is 0.4 Pa
- the electric power of the direct current (DC) power source is 0.5 kW.
- first heat treatment is performed under a condition where the atmosphere of a chamber in which the substrate is set is an atmosphere of nitrogen or dry air.
- the temperature of the first heat treatment is higher than or equal to 400° C. and lower than or equal to 750° C.
- a first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 a is formed (see FIG. 29A ).
- the deposition temperature or the first heat treatment causes crystallization from a film surface and crystal grows from the film surface toward the inside of the film; thus, c-axis aligned crystal is obtained.
- the first heat treatment a large amount of zinc and oxygen gather to the film surface, and one or more layers of graphen-type two-dimensional crystal including zinc and oxygen and having a hexagonal upper plane are formed at the outermost surface; the layer(s) at the outermost surface grow in the thickness direction to form a stack of layers.
- crystal growth proceeds from the surface to the inside and further from the inside to the bottom.
- oxygen in the insulating layer 437 that is an oxide insulating layer is diffused to an interface between the insulating layer 437 and the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 a or the vicinity of the interface (within ⁇ 5 nm from the interface), whereby oxygen deficiency in the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is reduced. Therefore, it is preferable that oxygen be included in (in a bulk of) the insulating layer 437 used as a base insulating layer or at the interface between the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 a and the insulating layer 437 at an amount that exceeds at least the stoichiometric proportion.
- a second oxide semiconductor film with a thickness more than 10 nm is formed over the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 a .
- the second oxide semiconductor film is formed by a sputtering method, and the substrate temperature in the film formation is set to be higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C.
- precursors can be arranged in the oxide semiconductor film formed over and in contact with the surface of the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and so-called orderliness can be obtained.
- the second oxide semiconductor film is formed to a thickness of 25 nm using oxygen, argon, or a mixed gas of argon and oxygen as a sputtering gas under conditions where a metal oxide target for an oxide semiconductor (a target for an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor including In 2 O 3 , Ga 2 O 3 , and ZnO at 1:1:2 [molar ratio]) is used, the distance between the substrate and the target is 170 mm, the substrate temperature is 400° C., the pressure is 0.4 Pa, and the electric power of the direct current (DC) power source is 0.5 kW.
- a metal oxide target for an oxide semiconductor a target for an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor including In 2 O 3 , Ga 2 O 3 , and ZnO at 1:1:2 [molar ratio]
- the distance between the substrate and the target is 170 mm
- the substrate temperature is 400° C.
- the pressure is 0.4 Pa
- the electric power of the direct current (DC) power source
- second heat treatment is performed under a condition where the atmosphere of a chamber in which the substrate is set is a nitrogen atmosphere, an oxygen atmosphere, or a mixed atmosphere of nitrogen and oxygen.
- the temperature of the second heat treatment is higher than or equal to 400° C. and lower than or equal to 750° C.
- a second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 b is formed (see FIG. 29B ).
- the second heat treatment is performed in a nitrogen atmosphere, an oxygen atmosphere, or a mixed atmosphere of nitrogen and oxygen, whereby the density of the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is increased and the number of defects therein is reduced.
- crystal growth proceeds in the thickness direction with the use of the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 a as a nucleus, that is, crystal growth proceeds from the bottom to the inside; thus, the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 b is formed.
- steps from the formation of the insulating layer 437 to the second heat treatment be successively performed without exposure to the air.
- the steps from the formation of the insulating layer 437 to the second heat treatment are preferably performed in an atmosphere which is controlled to include little hydrogen and moisture (such as an inert gas atmosphere, a reduced-pressure atmosphere, or a dry-air atmosphere); in terms of moisture, for example, a dry nitrogen atmosphere with a dew point of ⁇ 40° C. or lower, preferably a dew point of ⁇ 50° C. or lower may be employed.
- the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers, the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 a and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 b is processed into an oxide semiconductor layer 453 including a stack of island-shaped oxide semiconductor layers (see FIG. 29C ).
- the interface between the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 a and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 b are indicated by a dotted line, and the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 a and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 450 b are illustrated as a stack of oxide semiconductor layers; however, the interface is actually not distinct and is illustrated for easy understanding.
- the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers can be processed by being etched after a mask having a desired shape is formed over the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers.
- the mask can be formed by a method such as photolithography.
- the mask may be formed by a method such as an ink-jet method.
- etching of the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers either dry etching or wet etching may be employed. Needless to say, both of them may be employed in combination.
- a feature of the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer obtained by the above formation method is that they have c-axis alignment.
- the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer comprise an oxide including a crystal with c-axis alignment (also referred to as C-axis Aligned Crystal (CAAC)), which has neither a single crystal structure nor an amorphous structure.
- CAAC C-axis Aligned Crystal
- the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer partly include a crystal grain boundary.
- examples of a material for the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer include a four-component metal oxide such as an In—Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based material; three-component metal oxides such as an In—Ga—Zn—O-based material (also referred to as IGZO), an In—Sn—Zn—O-based material (also referred to as ITZO), an In—Al—Zn—O-based material, a Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based material, an Al—Ga—Zn—O-based material, a Sn—Al—Zn—O-based material, an In—Hf—Zn—O-based material, an In—La—Zn—O-based material, an In—Ce—Zn—O-based material, an In—Pr—Zn—O-based material, an In—Nd—Zn—O-based material, an In—Sm—Zn—O-based material, an In—Eu
- an In—Ga—Zn—O-based material means an oxide material including indium (In), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn), and there is no particular limitation on the composition ratio.
- the In—Ga—Zn—O-based material may include an element other than In, Ga, and Zn.
- a stacked structure including three or more layers may be formed by repeatedly performing a process of film formation and heat treatment for forming a third crystalline oxide semiconductor layer after the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is formed.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 453 including the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers formed by the above formation method can be used as appropriate for a transistor which can be applied to a semiconductor device disclosed in this specification.
- the transistor 2470 in Embodiment 3 in which the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers of this embodiment is used as the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 , an electric field is not applied from one surface to the other surface of the oxide semiconductor layer and current does not flow in the thickness direction (from one surface to the other surface; specifically, in the vertical direction in FIG. 18C ) of the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers.
- the transistor has a structure in which current mainly flows along the interface of the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers; therefore, even when the transistor is irradiated with light or even when a BT stress is applied to the transistor, deterioration of transistor characteristics is suppressed or reduced.
- the transistor By forming a transistor with the use of a stack of a first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and a second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer, like the oxide semiconductor layer 453 , the transistor can have stable electric characteristics and high reliability.
- This embodiment can be implemented in an appropriate combination with any of the structures described in the other embodiments.
- FIGS. 20A, 20B, 20C, 20C ′, 20 D, 20 D′, 20 E, and 20 E′ an example of a substrate used in a liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 20A, 20B, 20C, 20C ′, 20 D, 20 D′, 20 E, and 20 E′.
- a layer to be separated 6116 which includes a transistor, an interlayer insulating film, a wiring, and a pixel electrode, and depending on a case, a counter electrode, a light-blocking film, an alignment film, or the like, is formed over a substrate 6200 with a separation layer 6201 interposed therebetween.
- the substrate 6200 may be a quartz substrate, a sapphire substrate, a ceramic substrate, a glass substrate, a metal substrate, or the like. Note that such a substrate which is thick enough to be definitely flexible enables precise formation of an element such as a transistor.
- the degree “not to be definitely flexible” means that the elastic modulus of the substrate is higher than or equivalent to that of a glass substrate used in generally fabricating a liquid crystal display.
- the separation layer 6201 is formed with a single layer or a stacked layer using any of elements selected from tungsten (W), molybdenum (Mo), titanium (Ti), tantalum (Ta), niobium (Nb), nickel (Ni), cobalt (Co), zirconium (Zr), zinc (Zn), ruthenium (Ru), rhodium (Rh), palladium (Pd), osmium (Os), iridium (Ir), and silicon (Si), an alloy material containing any of the above elements as its main component, and a compound material containing any of the above elements as its main component by a sputtering method, a plasma CVD method, a coating method, a printing method, or the like.
- a tungsten layer, a molybdenum layer, or a layer containing a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum is preferably formed.
- a layer containing an oxide or an oxynitride of tungsten, a layer containing an oxide or an oxynitride of molybdenum, or a layer containing an oxide or an oxynitride of a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum is formed.
- the mixture of tungsten and molybdenum corresponds to an alloy of tungsten and molybdenum, for example.
- a metal layer and a metal oxide layer be formed as a first layer and a second layer, respectively.
- a metal layer and a metal oxide layer be formed as a first layer and a second layer, respectively.
- an oxide layer such as a silicon oxide which can be utilized as an insulating layer
- the layer to be separated 6116 includes components necessary for an element substrate, such as a transistor, an interlayer insulating film, a wiring, and a pixel electrode, and further, depending on a case, a counter electrode, a light-blocking film, an alignment film, or the like. Such components can be normally formed over the separation layer 6201 . Materials, manufacturing methods, and structures of these components are similar to those described in any of the above embodiments, and repeated description thereof is omitted in this embodiment. Thus, the transistor and the electrode can be formed precisely using a known material and a known method.
- the layer to be separated 6116 is bonded to a temporary supporting substrate 6202 with the use of an adhesive 6203 for separation and then, the layer to be separated 6116 is separated from the separation layer 6201 over the substrate 6200 to be transferred (see FIG. 20B ). Through this process, the layer to be separated 6116 is placed on the temporary supporting substrate side. Note that in this specification, a process in which a layer to be separated is transferred to a temporary supporting substrate from a formation substrate is referred to as a transfer process.
- a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a sapphire substrate, a ceramic substrate, a metal substrate, or the like can be used as the temporary supporting substrate 6202 .
- a plastic substrate which can withstand the temperature of the following process may be used.
- an adhesive which is soluble in water or a solvent, an adhesive which is capable of being plasticized upon irradiation of UV light, or the like is used so that the temporary supporting substrate 6202 and the layer to be separated 6116 can be separated when necessary.
- any of various methods can be used as appropriate in a transfer process to the temporary supporting substrate 6202 .
- a film including a metal oxide film is formed as the separation layer 6201 so as to be in contact with the layer to be separated, the metal oxide film is embrittled by crystallization, whereby the layer to be separated 6116 can be separated from the substrate 6200 .
- an amorphous silicon film containing hydrogen is formed as the separation layer 6201 between the substrate 6200 and the layer to be separated 6116 , the amorphous silicon film containing hydrogen is removed by laser light irradiation or etching, so that the layer to be separated 6116 can be separated from the substrate 6200 .
- the separation layer 6201 can be irradiated with laser light to release the nitrogen, oxygen, or hydrogen contained in the separation layer 6201 as a gas, so that separation between the layer to be separated 6116 and the substrate 6200 can be promoted.
- a liquid may be made to penetrate the interface between the separation layer 6201 and the layer to be separated 6116 to cause separation of the layer to be separated 6116 from the substrate 6200 .
- the separation layer 6201 is formed using tungsten, the separation may be performed while the separation layer 6201 is etched with the use of an ammonia hydrogen peroxide mixture.
- the transfer process can be facilitated by using plural kinds of separation methods described above in combination. That is, the separation can be performed with physical force (by a machine or the like) after performing laser light irradiation on part of the separation layer, etching on part of the separation layer with a gas, a solution, or the like, or mechanical removal of part of the separation layer with a sharp knife, a scalpel, or the like, in order that the separation layer and the layer to be separated can be easily separated from each other.
- the separation layer 6201 is formed to have a stacked-layer structure of metal and a metal oxide
- the layer to be separated can be physically separated easily from the separation layer by using a groove formed by laser light irradiation or a scratch made by a sharp knife, a scalpel, or the like as a trigger.
- the separation may be performed while a liquid such as water is poured.
- a method for separating the layer to be separated 6116 from the substrate 6200 may alternatively be employed in which the substrate 6200 over which the layer to be separated 6116 is formed is removed by mechanical polishing or by etching using a solution or a halogen fluoride gas such as NF 3 , BrF 3 , or ClF 3 , or the like. In that case, the separation layer 6201 is not necessarily provided.
- a surface of the layer to be separated 6116 or the separation layer 6201 exposed due to separation of the layer to be separated 6116 from the substrate 6200 is bonded to a transfer substrate 6110 with the use of a first adhesive layer 6111 including an adhesive different from the adhesive 6203 for separation (see FIG. 20C ).
- various curable adhesives e.g., a light curable adhesive such as a UV curable adhesive, a reactive curable adhesive, a thermal curable adhesive, and an anaerobic adhesive can be used.
- a light curable adhesive such as a UV curable adhesive, a reactive curable adhesive, a thermal curable adhesive, and an anaerobic adhesive.
- various substrates with high toughness such as an organic resin film and a metal substrate, can be preferably used.
- Substrates with high toughness have high impact resistance and thus are less likely to be damaged.
- An organic resin film and a thin metal substrate, which are lightweight, enable significant weight reduction as compared to a general glass substrate. With the use of such a substrate, it is possible to fabricate a lightweight liquid crystal display device which is not easily damaged.
- a substrate which has high toughness and transmits visible light may be used as the transfer substrate 6110 .
- polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), an acrylic resin, a polyacrylonitrile resin, a polyimide resin, a polymethyl methacrylate resin, a polycarbonate (PC) resin, a polyethersulfone (PES) resin, a polyamide resin, a cycloolefin resin, a polystyrene resin, a polyamide imide resin, and a polyvinylchloride resin can be given.
- a substrate made of such an organic resin has high toughness and thus has high impact resistance and is less likely to be damaged. Further, a film of such an organic resin, which is lightweight, enables significant reduction in weight of a display device unlike a general glass substrate.
- the transfer substrate 6110 further include a metal plate 6206 provided with an opening in a portion overlapped with at least a region of each pixel through which light is transmitted.
- FIG. 21A is an example of a top view of a liquid crystal display device.
- the metal plate 6206 having openings formed in a grid so as to leave a portion overlapping with the first wiring layer 6210 and/or the second wiring layer 6211 as in FIG. 21B may be used. Attachment of the metal plate 6206 makes it possible to suppress a change in dimension due to unfavorable alignment or extension of a substrate because of the use of a substrate made of an organic resin (see FIG. 21C ).
- a polarizing plate (not illustrated) is necessary, it may be provided between the transfer substrate 6110 and the metal plate 6206 or outside the metal plate 6206 .
- the polarizing plate may be attached to the metal plate 6206 in advance. Note that in terms of weight reduction, a substrate which is thin but has dimension stability is preferably used as the metal plate 6206 .
- the temporary supporting substrate 6202 is separated from the layer to be separated 6116 . Since the adhesive 6203 for separation includes a material capable of separating the temporary supporting substrate 6202 and the layer to be separated 6116 from each other when necessary, the temporary supporting substrate 6202 may be separated by a method depending on the material. Note that light is emitted from the backlight as shown by arrows in the drawing (see FIG. 20E ).
- the layer to be separated 6116 which includes components such as the transistor and the pixel electrode (a counter electrode, a light-blocking film, an alignment film, or the like may also be provided as necessary), can be formed over the transfer substrate 6110 , whereby a lightweight element substrate with high impact resistance can be formed.
- the liquid crystal display device having the above structure is one embodiment of the present invention, and the present invention also includes a liquid crystal display device having a structure different from that of the above liquid crystal display device.
- the metal plate 6206 may be attached to a surface of the exposed separation layer 6201 or the layer to be separated 6116 before attachment of the transfer substrate 6110 (see FIG. 20C ′).
- a barrier layer 6207 is preferably provided between the metal plate 6206 and the layer to be separated 6116 so that a contaminant from the metal plate 6206 can be prevented from adversely affecting characteristics of the transistor in the layer to be separated 6116 .
- the barrier layer 6207 may be provided over the surface of the exposed separation layer 6201 or the layer to be separated 6116 before attachment of the metal plate 6206 .
- the barrier layer 6207 may be formed using an inorganic material, an organic material, or the like and typically silicon nitride and the like can be given. However, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto as long as contamination of the transistor can be prevented.
- the barrier layer is formed using a light-transmitting material or formed to a thickness small enough to transmit light so that the barrier layer can transmit at least visible light.
- the metal plate 6206 may be bonded with the use of a second adhesive layer (not illustrated) including an adhesive different from the adhesive 6203 for separation.
- the first adhesive layer 6111 is formed over a surface of the metal plate 6206 and the transfer substrate 6110 is attached to the first adhesive layer 6111 ( FIG. 20D ′) and the temporary supporting substrate 6202 is separated from the layer to be separated 6116 ( FIG. 20E ′), whereby a lightweight element substrate with high impact resistance can be formed. Note that light is emitted from the backlight as shown by arrows in the drawing.
- the lightweight element substrate with high impact resistance formed as described above is firmly attached to a counter substrate with the use of a sealant with a liquid crystal layer provided between the substrates, whereby a lightweight liquid crystal display device with high impact resistance can be manufactured.
- a counter substrate a substrate which has high toughness and transmits visible light (similar to a plastic substrate which can be used as the transfer substrate 6110 ) can be used. Further, a polarizing plate, a light-blocking film, a counter electrode, or an alignment film may be provided as necessary.
- a dispenser method, an injection method, or the like can be employed as in the conventional case.
- the lightweight liquid crystal display device with high impact resistance manufactured as described above a fine element such as the transistor can be formed over a glass substrate or the like which has relatively high dimensional stability, and the conventional manufacturing method can be applied, so that even such a fine element can be formed precisely. Therefore, the lightweight liquid crystal display device with high impact resistance can display images with high precision and high quality.
- liquid crystal display device manufactured as described above may be flexible.
- This embodiment can be implemented in combination with any of the above embodiments as appropriate.
- FIGS. 22A and 22B illustrate an example of a pixel which can be used for a liquid crystal display device.
- FIG. 22A is a top view of the pixel
- FIG. 22B is a cross-sectional view taken along dashed line A 1 -A 2 in FIG. 22A .
- FIG. 23 is the top view in which a transmissive pixel electrode 505 and a reflective pixel electrode 525 in FIG. 22A are omitted so that a structure of the pixel described in this embodiment can be easily understood.
- the pixel illustrated in FIGS. 22A and 22B includes a wiring 501 functioning as a scan line GL, a wiring 502 functioning as a signal line SL, a wiring 503 functioning as a common wiring COM, the first pixel transistor 16 a , a wiring 504 functioning as the second terminal of the first pixel transistor 16 a , and a wiring 518 .
- the wiring 501 also functions as the gate electrode of the first pixel transistor 16 a illustrated in FIG. 2B .
- the wiring 502 also functions as the first terminal of the first pixel transistor 16 a.
- the pixel illustrated in FIGS. 22A and 22B includes a wiring 511 functioning as an enable line ENR, the second pixel transistor 16 b , a wiring 521 also functioning as the gate electrode of the second pixel transistor 16 b , a wiring 522 also functioning as the first terminal of the second pixel transistor 16 b , a wiring 523 also functioning as the second terminal of the second pixel transistor 16 b , and a capacitor electrode 524 .
- the wiring 501 , the wiring 518 , the wiring 521 , and the capacitor electrode 524 can be formed by processing one conductive film formed over a substrate 500 having an insulating surface with a base film 508 provided therebetween into a desired shape.
- a gate insulating film 506 is formed over the wiring 501 , the wiring 518 , the wiring 521 , and the capacitor electrode 524 .
- the wiring 502 , the wiring 503 , the wiring 504 , the wiring 511 , the wiring 522 , and the wiring 523 can be formed by processing one conductive film formed over the gate insulating film 506 into a desired shape.
- An active layer 507 of the first pixel transistor 16 a is formed over the gate insulating film 506 so as to overlap with the wiring 501 .
- the active layer 507 preferably overlaps completely with the wiring 501 functioning as a gate electrode.
- An active layer 527 of the second pixel transistor 16 b is formed over the gate insulating film 506 so as to overlap with the wiring 521 .
- the active layer 527 preferably overlaps completely with the wiring 521 functioning as a gate electrode.
- an oxide semiconductor in the active layer 507 and the active layer 527 can be prevented from deteriorating owing to incident light from the substrate 500 side; thus, deterioration of characteristics of the first pixel transistor 16 a and the second pixel transistor 16 b , such as a shift of the threshold voltage, can be prevented.
- an insulating film 512 and an insulating film 513 are sequentially formed so as to cover the active layer 507 , the wiring 502 , the wiring 504 , the active layer 527 , the wiring 522 , and the wiring 523 .
- the transmissive pixel electrode 505 in a transmissive region and the reflective pixel electrode 525 in a reflective region are formed over the insulating film 513
- the wiring 504 and the wiring 523 are connected to the transmissive pixel electrode 505 and the reflective pixel electrode 525 , respectively, through contact holes formed in the insulating film 512 and the insulating film 513 .
- the wiring 518 , the wiring 511 , the wiring 522 , and the wiring 503 are connected to the wiring 504 , the wiring 521 , the wiring 518 , and the capacitor electrode 524 , respectively, through contact holes formed in the gate insulating film 506 .
- a portion where the wiring 503 overlaps with the wiring 518 with the gate insulating film 506 provided therebetween functions as the first capacitor 17 a and a portion where the wiring 523 overlaps with the capacitor electrode 524 with the gate insulating film 506 provided therebetween functions as the second capacitor 17 b.
- a surface of the insulating film 513 may be etched selectively so as to be uneven such that the reflective pixel electrode 525 has an uneven surface.
- incident light from the outside is irregularly reflected, so that more favorable display can be performed. Accordingly, visibility of display is improved.
- the oxide semiconductor in the active layer 507 and the active layer 527 can be prevented from deteriorating owing to stray light entered from the pixel electrode side; thus, deterioration of characteristics of the first pixel transistor 16 a and the second pixel transistor 16 b , such as a shift of the threshold voltage, can be prevented.
- the transmissive pixel electrode 505 (or the reflective pixel electrode 525 ) overlaps with a counter electrode (not shown) with a liquid crystal layer (not shown) therebetween is described; however, the structure of the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this structure.
- the pixel electrode and the counter electrode may be formed over one substrate.
- FIG. 24A is a top view of a panel where a substrate 4001 and a counter substrate 4006 are bonded to each other with a sealant 4005 .
- FIG. 24B corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along broken line A-A′ in FIG. 24A .
- the sealant 4005 is provided so as to surround a pixel portion 4002 and a scan line driver circuit 4004 provided over the substrate 4001 .
- the counter substrate 4006 is provided over the pixel portion 4002 and the scan line driver circuit 4004 .
- the pixel portion 4002 and the scan line driver circuit 4004 are sealed together with a liquid crystal layer 4007 by the substrate 4001 , the sealant 4005 , and the counter substrate 4006 .
- a substrate 4021 provided with a signal line driver circuit 4003 is mounted in a region which is different from a region surrounded by the sealant 4005 over the substrate 4001 .
- FIG. 24B illustrates a transistor 4009 included in the signal line driver circuit 4003 .
- FIG. 24B illustrates transistors 4010 a , 4010 b , and 4022 which are included in the pixel portion 4002 .
- Each of the transistors 4010 a , 4010 b , and 4022 includes an oxide semiconductor in a channel formation region.
- a light-blocking film 4040 provided for the counter substrate 4006 overlaps with a channel formation region of the transistor 4022 .
- the light-blocking metal film 4013 may be an electrode in a floating state, an electrode electrically connected to the oxide semiconductor of the transistor 4010 a , or an electrode electrically connected to a gate electrode of the transistor 4010 a.
- a light-blocking resin film may be used instead of the light-blocking metal film 4013 .
- the light-blocking resin film containing black colorant such as carbon black may be formed by an inkjet method or the like so as to overlap with the channel formation region of the transistor 4010 a.
- a pixel electrode 4030 a formed using a light-transmitting conductive film is electrically connected to the transistor 4010 a .
- a counter electrode 4031 is provided for the counter substrate 4006 .
- a portion where the pixel electrode 4030 a , the counter electrode 4031 , and the liquid crystal layer 4007 overlap with one another corresponds to a liquid crystal element 4011 a in a transmissive region.
- a pixel electrode 4030 b which is a reflective electrode is electrically connected to the transistor 4010 b .
- a portion where the pixel electrode 4030 b , the counter electrode 4031 , and the liquid crystal layer 4007 overlap with one another corresponds to a liquid crystal element 4011 b in a reflective region.
- the pixel electrode 4030 b which is the reflective electrode overlaps with the channel formation region of the transistor 4010 b .
- a spacer 4035 is provided to control a distance (cell gap) between the pixel electrode 4030 a and the counter electrode 4031 and between the pixel electrode 4030 b and the counter electrode 4031 .
- FIG. 24B shows the case where the spacer 4035 is formed in a columnar shape by patterning of an insulating film; alternatively, a spherical spacer may be used.
- connection terminal 4016 A variety of signals and potentials that are applied to the signal line driver circuit 4003 , the scan line driver circuit 4004 , and the pixel portion 4002 are supplied from a connection terminal 4016 through the wiring 4014 and a wiring 4015 .
- the connection terminal 4016 is electrically connected to a FPC 4018 and an anisotropic conductive film 4019 .
- a dispenser method (a dropping method) or a dip method (a pumping method) by which a liquid crystal is injected utilizing a capillary action after the attachment of the counter substrate 4006 can be used as a method for forming the liquid crystal layer 4007 .
- a partition 4036 is preferably provided between the liquid crystal layer 4007 and the sealant 4005 so that the liquid crystal layer 4007 and the sealant 4005 are prevented from being mixed with each other.
- the partition 4036 can be formed using the same material and the same steps as those of the spacer 4035 .
- the partition 4036 can be formed using, for example, an inorganic material such as silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum oxide, aluminum nitride, aluminum oxynitride, or aluminum nitride oxide, polyimide, an acrylic resin, a benzocyclobutene-based resin, polyamide, an epoxy resin, a siloxane-based resin, or the like.
- an inorganic material such as silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum oxide, aluminum nitride, aluminum oxynitride, or aluminum nitride oxide
- polyimide an acrylic resin, a benzocyclobutene-based resin, polyamide, an epoxy resin, a siloxane-based resin, or the like.
- a thin film may be formed by a sputtering method, a vacuum evaporation method, a PVD method, or a CVD method such as a low-pressure CVD (LPCVD) method or a plasma CVD method, and then etched into a desired shape.
- the partition 4036 can be formed by a droplet discharge method by which a pattern can be selectively formed, a printing method by which a pattern can be transferred or drawn (a method for forming a pattern, such as screen printing or offset printing), a coating method such as a spin coating method, a dipping method, a dispenser method, an imprint method, a nanoimprint method, or the like.
- a liquid crystal dropping apparatus in FIG. 25 includes a control device 40 , an imaging means 42 , and a head 43 .
- the head 43 is filled with liquid crystal 44 .
- the liquid crystal dropping apparatus, the substrate 4001 , and the counter substrate 4006 can be aligned by taking images of a marker 45 on the substrate 4001 and a marker 46 on the counter substrate 4006 using the imaging means 42 .
- the sealant 4005 and the partition 4036 functioning as a barrier layer formed inside the sealant 4005 are provided for the counter substrate 4006 in a closed loop pattern, and the liquid crystal 44 is dropped therein once or plural times from the head 43 .
- the liquid crystal material has high viscosity
- the liquid crystal material is continuously discharged and attached to a liquid crystal formation region without a break.
- the liquid crystal material has low viscosity
- the liquid crystal material is intermittently discharged to drop a droplet.
- a heater may be provided in the head 43 , so that the viscosity can be adjusted by heating with the heater.
- the partition 4036 is formed as a barrier layer inside the sealant 4005 as illustrated in FIGS. 24A and 24B and FIG. 25 , so that the sealant 4005 and the liquid crystal layer 4007 are not mixed with each other; thus, reaction between the sealant 4005 and the liquid crystal layer 4007 , contamination of the liquid crystal layer 4007 by the sealant 4005 , or the like can be prevented.
- the substrate 4001 and the counter substrate 4006 are bonded to each other and ultraviolet curing is performed, so that the enclosed space is filled with liquid crystal; thus, the liquid crystal layer 4007 can be formed.
- the sealant 4005 may be formed on the substrate 4001 side, and a liquid crystal may be dropped. Note that the bonding between the substrate 4001 and the counter substrate 4006 is preferably performed under reduced pressure.
- plastics include, in its category, a fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) plate, a polyvinyl fluoride (PVF) film, a polyester film, an acrylic resin film, and the like.
- FRP fiberglass-reinforced plastic
- PVF polyvinyl fluoride
- a polyester film a polyester film
- acrylic resin film an acrylic resin film
- a sheet having a structure in which an aluminum foil is sandwiched between PVF films can be used.
- a substrate placed in a direction in which light is extracted through the liquid crystal elements 4011 a and 4011 b is formed using a light-transmitting material such as a glass plate, plastic, a polyester film, or an acrylic film.
- FIG. 26 is an example of a perspective view of the structure of the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention.
- the liquid crystal display device illustrated in FIG. 26 includes a panel 1601 including a pixel portion, a first diffusion plate 1602 , a prism sheet 1603 , a second diffusion plate 1604 , a light guide plate 1605 , a backlight panel 1607 , a circuit board 1608 , and substrates 1611 provided with signal line driver circuits.
- the panel 1601 , the first diffusion plate 1602 , the prism sheet 1603 , the second diffusion plate 1604 , the light guide plate 1605 , and the backlight panel 1607 are sequentially stacked.
- the backlight panel 1607 includes a backlight 1612 including a plurality of backlight units. Light from the backlight 1612 that is diffused in the light guide plate 1605 is delivered to the panel 1601 through the first diffusion plate 1602 , the prism sheet 1603 , and the second diffusion plate 1604 .
- the number of diffusion plates is not limited to two.
- the number of diffusion plates may be one, or may be three or more. It is acceptable as long as the diffusion plate is provided between the light guide plate 1605 and the panel 1601 . Therefore, the diffusion plate may be provided only on the side closer to the panel 1601 than the prism sheet 1603 , or may be provided only on the side closer to the light guide plate 1605 than the prism sheet 1603 .
- the shape of the cross section of the prism sheet 1603 which is shown in FIG. 26 , is not limited to a serrate shape; the shape may be a shape with which light from the light guide plate 1605 can be gathered to the panel 1601 side.
- the circuit board 1608 is provided with a circuit which generates various signals input to the panel 1601 , a circuit which processes the signals, or the like.
- the circuit board 1608 and the panel 1601 are connected to each other via COF tapes 1609 .
- the substrates 1611 provided with the signal line driver circuits are connected to the COF tapes 1609 by a chip on film (COF) method.
- COF chip on film
- FIG. 26 illustrates an example in which the circuit board 1608 is provided with a control circuit which controls driving of the backlight 1612 , and the control circuit and the backlight panel 1607 are connected to each other through an FPC 1610 .
- the control circuit may be formed over the panel 1601 . In that case, the panel 1601 and the backlight panel 1607 are connected to each other through an FPC or the like.
- This embodiment can be implemented in combination with other embodiments as appropriate.
- liquid crystal display device an electronic device capable of displaying a high-quality image can be provided.
- an electronic device with low power consumption can be provided.
- continuous use time becomes longer by adding the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention as a component, which is an advantage.
- the liquid crystal display device can be used for display devices, laptop personal computers, or image reproducing devices provided with recording media (typically, devices which reproduce the content of recording media such as digital versatile discs (DVDs) and have displays for displaying the reproduced images).
- recording media typically, devices which reproduce the content of recording media such as digital versatile discs (DVDs) and have displays for displaying the reproduced images.
- electronic devices each including the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention mobile phones, portable game machines, portable information terminals, e-book readers, video cameras, digital still cameras, goggle-type displays (head mounted displays), navigation systems, audio reproducing devices (e.g., car audio components and digital audio players), copiers, facsimiles, printers, multifunction printers, automated teller machines (ATM), vending machines, and the like can be given. Specific examples of such an electronic device are illustrated in FIGS. 27A to 27F .
- FIG. 27A illustrates an e-book reader including a housing 7001 , a display portion 7002 , and the like.
- a liquid crystal display device can be used for the display portion 7002 .
- an e-book reader capable of displaying a high-quality image or an e-book reader with low power consumption can be provided.
- the liquid crystal display device can have flexibility; thus, a flexible, lightweight, and easy-to-use e-book reader can be provided.
- FIG. 27B illustrates a display device including a housing 7011 , a display portion 7012 , a supporting base 7013 , and the like.
- a liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used for the display portion 7012 .
- a display device capable of displaying a high-quality image or a display device with low power consumption can be provided.
- the display device includes in its category, any information display device for personal computers, TV broadcast reception, advertisement, and the like.
- FIG. 27C illustrates an automated teller machine including a housing 7021 , a display portion 7022 , a coin slot 7023 , a bill slot 7024 , a card slot 7025 , a bankbook slot 7026 , and the like.
- a liquid crystal display device can be used for the display portion 7022 . With the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention applied to the display portion 7022 , an automated teller machine capable of displaying a high-quality image or an automated teller machine with low power consumption can be provided.
- FIG. 27D illustrates a portable game machine including a housing 7031 , a housing 7032 , a display portion 7033 , a display portion 7034 , a microphone 7035 , speakers 7036 , an operation key 7037 , a stylus 7038 , and the like.
- a liquid crystal display device can be used for the display portion 7033 or the display portion 7034 .
- the liquid crystal display device applied to the display portion 7033 or the display portion 7034 , a portable game machine capable of displaying a high-quality image or a portable game machine with low power consumption can be provided.
- the portable game machine illustrated in FIG. 27D has the two display portions 7033 and 7034 .
- the number of display portions included in a portable game machine is not limited thereto.
- FIG. 27E illustrates a mobile phone which includes a housing 7041 , a display portion 7042 , an audio input portion 7043 , an audio output portion 7044 , operation keys 7045 , a light-receiving portion 7046 , and the like.
- Light received in the light-receiving portion 7046 is converted into electrical signals, whereby external images can be loaded.
- a liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used for the display portion 7042 . With the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention applied to the display portion 7042 , a mobile phone capable of displaying a high-quality image or a mobile phone with low power consumption can be provided.
- FIG. 27F illustrates a portable information terminal including a housing 7051 , a display portion 7052 , operation keys 7053 , and the like.
- a modem may be incorporated in the housing 7051 of the portable information terminal illustrated in FIG. 27F .
- a liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used for the display portion 7052 . With the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention applied to the display portion 7052 , a portable information terminal capable of displaying a high-quality image or a portable information terminal with low power consumption can be provided.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- Nonlinear Science (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Mathematical Physics (AREA)
- Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
- Geometry (AREA)
- Ceramic Engineering (AREA)
- Liquid Crystal (AREA)
- Control Of Indicators Other Than Cathode Ray Tubes (AREA)
- Liquid Crystal Display Device Control (AREA)
- Shift Register Type Memory (AREA)
- Thin Film Transistor (AREA)
Abstract
A reflective region where display is performed with reflection of incident light through a liquid crystal layer and a transmissive region where display is performed by transmission of light from a backlight are provided, and the reflective mode and the transmissive mode are switched. In the case of displaying a full-color image, a pixel portion includes at least a first region and a second region, a plurality of lights of different hues are sequentially supplied to the first region according to a first order, and a plurality of lights of different hues are also sequentially supplied to the second region according to a second order which is different from the first order. In the transmissive mode, the reflective region is made to display black, so that decrease in contrast due to reflection of external light at the reflective region is prevented.
Description
- 1. Field of the Invention
- The present invention relates to a liquid crystal display device and a method for driving the liquid crystal display device.
- 2. Description of the Related Art
- It is known that liquid crystal display devices are roughly divided into two kinds of liquid crystal display devices: transmissive liquid crystal display devices and reflective liquid crystal display devices.
- In a transmissive liquid crystal display device, a backlight such as a cold cathode fluorescent lamp is used, and a state in which light from the backlight is transmitted through a liquid crystal and output to the outside of the liquid crystal display device or a state in which light is not output is selected using optical modulation action of liquid crystal, whereby bright and dark images are displayed. Further, those displays are combined to display an image.
- In a reflective liquid crystal display device, a state in which external light, in other words, incident light is reflected at a pixel electrode and output to the outside of the device or a state in which incident light is not output to the outside of the device is selected using optical modulation action of liquid crystal, whereby bright and dark images are displayed. Further, those displays are combined to display an image.
- A color filter method and a field-sequential method are known as display methods of liquid crystal display devices. Liquid crystal display devices in which images are displayed by a field-sequential method are provided with a plurality of light sources exhibiting different colors (e.g., red (R), green (G), and blue (B)). A desired color is produced in such a manner that the plurality of light sources exhibiting different colors sequentially emit light and transmission of a light of each color is controlled in each pixel, so that color display is performed. That is, a field-sequential method is a method in which a desired color is realized with division of the display period into respective display periods for respective lights of colors.
-
Patent Document 1 discloses a liquid crystal display device in which images are displayed by a field-sequential method. Specifically,Patent Document 1 discloses a liquid crystal display device in which pixels each include a transistor for controlling input of an image signal, a signal storage capacitor for holding the image signal, and a transistor for controlling transfer of electric charge from the signal storage capacitor to a display pixel capacitor. In the liquid crystal display device having this structure, writing of an image signal to the signal storage capacitor and display corresponding to electric charge held at the display pixel capacitor can be performed at the same time. - An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of image display according to an environment around the liquid crystal display device, e.g., in a bright environment or a dim environment.
- Another object is to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of image display in both modes of a reflective mode in which external light is used as a light source and a transmissive mode in which a backlight is used.
- One embodiment of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device which is provided with a region (a reflective region) where display is performed with reflection of incident light through a liquid crystal layer and a region (a transmissive region) where display is performed with transmission of light from a backlight and can switch the transmissive mode and the reflective mode. In the transmissive mode, a first transistor connected to a first pixel electrode in the transmissive region is driven and a second transistor connected to a second pixel electrode in the reflective region is turned off. The first pixel electrode is formed using a conductive material transmitting light, and the second pixel electrode is formed using a conductive material reflecting light.
- In the transmissive mode, a period in which the second transistor connected to the second pixel electrode in the reflective region is turned on is provided every one frame or every plural frames, and an image signal of black is held in the reflective region during the period. An image signal of black is held in the reflective region in the transmissive mode, so that reduction in contrast due to reflection of external light at the reflective region can be prevented.
- The reflective region and the transmissive region are provided in one pixel and a signal line for supplying an image signal is shared by the reflective region and the transmissive region, whereby the number of wirings per pixel can be reduced. Specifically, the first transistor in the transmissive region is connected to a signal line and the second transistor in the reflective region is connected to the signal line via the first transistor. In the reflective mode, the first transistor and the second transistor are turned on, so that an image signal is supplied from the signal line to the reflective region.
- Display in the transmissive region is performed by a novel field-sequential method in which image signal writing and lighting of the backlight are sequentially performed not in the whole pixel portion but in each given region of the pixel portion. Note that as light sources of the backlight, a plurality of light-emitting diodes (LEDs) are used, with which lower power consumption than a cold cathode fluorescent lamp and adjustment of intensity of light can be realized.
- The novel field-sequential method enables reduction of the phenomenon that a user sees display which is changed (degraded) from display based on original display data. Such a phenomenon is caused by lack of specific display data due to block of the display for a short time, such as a user's blink, and is referred to as a color break or color breakup.
- One embodiment of the present invention disclosed in this specification includes a panel including a pixel portion and a driving circuit which controls input of image signals to the pixel portion; and a backlight. The backlight includes a plurality of light sources emitting lights of different hues. In addition, in one embodiment of the present invention, driving methods of the light sources are switched depending on whether a full-color image is displayed or a monochrome image is displayed.
- When a full-color image is displayed, a transmissive mode utilizing the novel field-sequential method is set, and the pixel portion is divided into a plurality of regions and lighting of the light sources is controlled per region. Specifically, the pixel portion includes at least a first region and a second region, a plurality of lights of different hues are sequentially supplied to the first region according to a first order, and a plurality of lights of different hues are also sequentially supplied to the second region according to a second order which is different from the first order.
- When a monochrome image is displayed, supply of light from the light sources is stopped and a reflective mode is set, so that a still image or a moving image is displayed by utilizing external light in the entire reflective region in the pixel portion or per region.
- In one embodiment of the present invention, when the monochrome image is a still image, the driving frequency is lower than that in the case where the monochrome image is a moving image. Further, in one embodiment of the present invention, a liquid crystal element and an insulated gate field effect transistor whose off-state current is extremely low (hereinafter referred to simply as a transistor) for controlling holding of a voltage applied to the liquid crystal element are provided in a pixel portion of a liquid crystal display device in order to lower the driving frequency. With the use of the transistor whose off-state current is extremely low, the period in which a voltage applied to the liquid crystal element is held can be longer. Accordingly, for example, in the case where image signals each having the same image information are written to a pixel portion for some consecutive frame periods, like a still image, display of an image can be maintained even when the driving frequency is low, in other words, the number of writings of image signals in a certain period is reduced.
- One embodiment of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device including a plurality of light sources emitting lights of different hues and a pixel portion including a plurality of pixels. Each pixel includes a first pixel electrode transmitting light, a second pixel electrode reflecting light, a first transistor, and a second transistor. One of a source and a drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to a signal line, the other of the source and the drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to the first pixel electrode and one of a source and a drain of the second transistor, and the other of the source and the drain of the second transistor is electrically connected to the second pixel electrode.
- One embodiment of the present invention is the above liquid crystal display device, in which color display is performed by dividing the pixel portion into a plurality of regions, controlling lighting of a plurality of light sources emitting lights of different hues in each of the plurality of regions, and driving the first transistor to apply a voltage to a part of a liquid crystal layer overlapping with the first pixel electrode, and monochrome display is performed by driving the first transistor and the second transistor to apply a voltage to a part of the liquid crystal layer overlapping with the second pixel electrode in a period during which a plurality of light sources is off.
- One embodiment of the present invention is the above liquid crystal display device, in which the pixel portion is divided into at least a first region and a second region, a plurality of lights of different hues are sequentially supplied to the first region according to a first order, and a plurality of lights of different hues are also sequentially supplied to the second region according to a second order which is different from the first order.
- The above transistors each include, in a channel formation region, a semiconductor material having a wider band gap and a lower intrinsic carrier density than silicon. With a channel formation region including a semiconductor material having the above characteristics, a transistor with an extremely low off-state current can be realized. As an example of such a semiconductor material, an oxide semiconductor having a band gap which is approximately three times as wide as that of silicon can be given. In contrast to a transistor formed using a normal semiconductor material, such as silicon or germanium, a transistor that has the above-described structure and is used as a switching element for holding a voltage applied to a liquid crystal element can effectively prevent leakage of electric charge from the liquid crystal element.
- The above-described pixel portion includes a region where the transmittance of a liquid crystal layer is controlled according to a voltage of a full-color image signal that is input, a first transistor which controls holding of a voltage that is to be applied to the liquid crystal layer overlapping with the above-described region, a region where the reflectance of the liquid crystal layer is controlled according to a voltage of a monochrome image signal that is input, and a second transistor which controls holding of a voltage that is to be applied to the liquid crystal layer overlapping with the latter region. A channel formation region of each of the first and second transistors includes a semiconductor material having a wider band gap and a lower intrinsic carrier density than a silicon semiconductor, such as an oxide semiconductor.
- Note that an oxide semiconductor which is purified (purified OS) by reduction of an impurity such as moisture or hydrogen which serves as an electron donor (donor) can be made to be an i-type (intrinsic) oxide semiconductor or an oxide semiconductor extremely close to an i-type semiconductor (a substantially i-type oxide semiconductor) by supplying oxygen to the oxide semiconductor to reduce oxygen deficiency in the oxide semiconductor. A transistor including the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor has a characteristic of extremely low off-state current.
- The hydrogen concentration in the purified oxide semiconductor which is measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS) is less than or equal to 5×1019/cm3, preferably less than or equal to 5×1018/cm3, further preferably less than or equal to 5×1017/cm3, still further preferably less than or equal to 1×1016/cm3.
- In addition, the carrier density of the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor, which is measured by Hall effect measurement, is less than 1×1014/cm3, preferably less than 1×1012/cm3, further preferably less than 1×1011/cm3. Furthermore, the band gap of the oxide semiconductor is 2 eV or more, preferably 2.5 eV or more, further preferably 3 eV or more. The transistor including the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor can have low off-state current.
- The analysis of the concentration of hydrogen in the oxide semiconductor film is described here. The concentrations of hydrogen in the oxide semiconductor film and a conductive film are measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS). It is known that it is difficult to obtain data in the proximity of a surface of a sample or in the proximity of an interface between stacked films formed using different materials by the SIMS analysis in principle. Thus, in the case where distributions of the hydrogen concentrations of the films in thickness directions are analyzed by SIMS, an average value in a region where the films are provided, the value is not greatly changed, and almost the same value can be obtained are employed as the hydrogen concentration. Further, in the case where the thickness of the film is small, a region where almost the same value can be obtained cannot be found in some cases due to the influence of the hydrogen concentration of the films adjacent to each other. In this case, the maximum value or the minimum value of the hydrogen concentration of a region where the films are provided is employed as the hydrogen concentration in the film. Furthermore, in the case where a mountain-shaped peak having the maximum value and a valley-shaped peak having the minimum value do not exist in the region where the films are provided, the value of the inflection point is employed as the hydrogen concentration.
- Various experiments can actually prove low off-state current of the transistor including the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor film as an active layer. For example, even with an element with a channel width of 1×106 μm and a channel length of 10 μm, in a range of from 1 V to 10 V of voltage (drain voltage) between a source electrode and a drain electrode, it is possible that off-state current (which is drain current in the case where voltage between a gate electrode and the source electrode is 0 V or less) is less than or equal to the measurement limit of a semiconductor parameter analyzer, that is, less than or equal to 1×10−13 A. In this case, it can be found that an off-state current density corresponding to a value obtained by dividing the off-state current by the channel width of the transistor is less than or equal to 100 zA/μm. In addition, a capacitor and a transistor were connected to each other and an off-state current density was measured by using a circuit in which electric charge flowing into or from the capacitor was controlled by the transistor. In the measurement, the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor film was used for a channel formation region of the transistor, and the off-state current density of the transistor was measured from a change in the amount of charge of the capacitor per unit time. As a result, it was found that in the case where the voltage between the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor was 3V, a lower off-state current density of several tens yoctoampere per micrometer (yA/μm) was able to be obtained. Thus, in a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention, the off-state current density of the transistor in which the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor film is used as an active layer can be set to less than or equal to 100 yA/μm, preferably less than or equal to 10 yA/μm, further preferably less than or equal to 1 yA/μm depending on the voltage between the source electrode and the drain electrode. Accordingly, the transistor including the i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor film as an active layer has much lower off-state current than a transistor including silicon having crystallinity.
- As the oxide semiconductor, a four-component metal oxide such as an In—Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, a three-component metal oxide such as an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, an In—Sn—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, an In—Al—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, a Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, an Al—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, or a Sn—Al—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, a two-component metal oxide such as an In—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, a Sn—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, an Al—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, a Zn—Mg—O-based oxide semiconductor, a Sn—Mg—O-based oxide semiconductor, an In—Mg—O-based oxide semiconductor, or an In—Ga—O-based oxide semiconductor, an In—O-based oxide semiconductor, a Sn—O-based oxide semiconductor, a Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor, or the like can be used. Note that in this specification, for example, an In—Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor means a metal oxide including indium (In), tin (Sn), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn). There is no particular limitation on the composition ratio. The above oxide semiconductor may include silicon oxide. Note that the oxide semiconductor may be amorphous or crystallized partly or entirely.
- When a crystalline oxide semiconductor is used as the oxide semiconductor, the oxide semiconductor is preferably formed over a level (flat) surface. Specifically, the oxide semiconductor is preferably formed over a surface whose average surface roughness (Ra) is 1 nm or less, further preferably 0.3 nm or less. Ra can be measured using an atomic force microscope (AFM).
- The oxide semiconductor preferably includes In, and further preferably includes In and Zn. In addition, Ga, Sn, Hf, Al, or a lanthanoid may be included in the above oxide semiconductor. Dehydration or dehydrogenation is effective for purification of the oxide semiconductor.
- In this specification, oxide semiconductors can be represented by the chemical formula, InMO3(ZnO)m (m >0), for example. Here, M represents one or more metal elements selected from Sn, Zn, Ga, Al, Mn, and Co.
- With one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to realize a liquid crystal display device capable of image display using a reflective mode utilizing external light as a light source and a transmissive mode utilizing a backlight according to an environment around the liquid crystal display device, e.g., in a bright environment or a dim environment. For example, a moving image is displayed using a transmissive mode, and a still image is displayed using a reflective mode.
- In the transmissive mode, black is displayed in the reflective region, so that reduction in contrast due to reflection of external light at the reflective region can be prevented.
- With the use of a transistor whose off-state current is extremely low, a period during which a voltage applied to a liquid crystal element is held can be longer. Accordingly, for example, the driving frequency with which a still image is displayed can be lower than that with which a moving image is displayed. Therefore, a liquid crystal display device with reduced power consumption in displaying a still image can be realized.
-
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a structure of a liquid crystal display device. -
FIGS. 2A and 2B illustrate configurations of a panel and a pixel. -
FIG. 3 schematically shows operations of a liquid crystal display device and a backlight. -
FIGS. 4A to 4C schematically illustrate an example of hues of light supplied to regions. -
FIG. 5 schematically illustrates an example of turning off of light supplied to regions. -
FIG. 6 illustrates a configuration of a scan line driver circuit. -
FIG. 7 schematically illustrates an x-th pulse output circuit 20_x. -
FIG. 8A illustrates a configuration of a pulse output circuit andFIGS. 8B and 8C are timing diagrams thereof. -
FIG. 9 is a timing diagram of a scan line driver circuit. -
FIG. 10 is a timing diagram of a scan line driver circuit. -
FIG. 11 illustrates a configuration of a signal line driver circuit. -
FIGS. 12A and 12B show examples of timing of image signals (DATA) supplied to signal lines. -
FIG. 13 shows timing of scanning of selection signals and timing of lighting of a backlight. -
FIG. 14 shows timing of scanning of selection signals and timing of turning off of a backlight. -
FIGS. 15A and 15B are diagrams each showing a configuration of a pulse output circuit. -
FIGS. 16A and 16B are diagrams each showing a configuration of a pulse output circuit. -
FIGS. 17A to 17C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method for manufacturing a transistor. -
FIGS. 18A to 18D are cross-sectional views of transistors. -
FIGS. 19A to 19C are cross-sectional views of transistors. -
FIGS. 20A, 20B, 20C, 20C ′, 20D, 20D′, 20E, and 20E′ are cross-sectional views illustrating methods for manufacturing liquid crystal display devices. -
FIGS. 21A to 21C are diagrams illustrating a manufacturing method of a liquid crystal display device. -
FIGS. 22A and 22B illustrate an example of a top view and a cross-sectional view of a pixel. -
FIG. 23 illustrates an example of a top view of a pixel. -
FIGS. 24A and 24B are a top view and a cross-sectional view illustrating a liquid crystal display device. -
FIG. 25 illustrates an example of forming a liquid crystal layer by a dispenser method. -
FIG. 26 is a perspective view illustrating a structure of a liquid crystal display device. -
FIGS. 27A to 27F are views of electronic devices. -
FIGS. 28A and 28B are cross-sectional views of transistors. -
FIGS. 29A to 29C illustrate one embodiment of an oxide semiconductor layer. - Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the description below, and it is easily understood by those skilled in the art that modes and details disclosed herein can be modified in various ways without departing from the spirit and the scope of the present invention. Therefore, the present invention is not construed as being limited to description of the embodiments.
- In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device including a still-image mode and a moving-image mode will be described with reference to
FIG. 1 . Note that in this specification, a mode performed in such a way that a display device determines image signals input to the display device as a still image is described as a still-image mode, and a mode performed in such a way that the display device determines the image signals input to the display device as a moving image is described as a moving-image mode. - A liquid
crystal display device 400 in this embodiment includes a plurality ofimage memories 401, an imagedata selection circuit 402, aselector 403, aCPU 404, acontroller 405, apanel 406, abacklight 407, and abacklight control circuit 408. - Image data corresponding to a full-color image (full-color image data 410), which are input to the liquid
crystal display device 400, are stored in the plurality ofimage memories 401. The full-color image data 410 include image data corresponding to their respective hues. The image data corresponding to the respective hues are stored in therespective image memories 401. - As the
image memories 401, for example, memory circuits such as dynamic random access memories (DRAMs) or static random access memories (SRAMs) can be used. - The image
data selection circuit 402 reads the full-color image data, which are stored in the plurality ofimage memories 401 and correspond to the respective hues, and sends the full-color image data to theselector 403 according to a command from thecontroller 405. - In addition, image data corresponding to a monochrome image (monochrome image data 411) are also input to the liquid
crystal display device 400. Then, themonochrome image data 411 are input to theselector 403. - Note that an image displayed with color gradations by using a plurality of light sources of colors having different hues is a full-color image. In addition, an image displayed by using a reflective electrode with the light sources turned off is a monochrome image.
- Although the structure in which the
monochrome image data 411 are directly input to theselector 403 is employed in this embodiment, the structure of one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this structure. Themonochrome image data 411 may also be stored in theimage memories 401 and then read by the imagedata selection circuit 402 similarly to the full-color image data 410. In that case, theselector 403 is included in the imagedata selection circuit 402. - Alternatively, the
monochrome image data 411 may be formed by synthesizing the full-color image data 410 in the liquidcrystal display device 400. - The
CPU 404 controls theselector 403 and thecontroller 405 so that the operations of theselector 403 and thecontroller 405 are switched between full-color image display and monochrome image display. - Specifically, in the case of the full-color image display, the
selector 403 selects the full-color image data 410 and supplies them to thepanel 406 in accordance with a command from theCPU 404. In addition, thecontroller 405 supplies thepanel 406 with a driving signal which is synchronized with the full-color image data 410 and/or a power supply potential which is to be used when the full-color image is displayed, in accordance with a command from theCPU 404. - In the case of the monochrome image display, the
selector 403 selects themonochrome image data 411 and supplies them to thepanel 406 in accordance with a command from theCPU 404. In addition, thecontroller 405 supplies thepanel 406 with a driving signal which is synchronized with themonochrome image data 411 and/or a power supply potential which is to be used when the monochrome image is displayed, in accordance with a command from theCPU 404. - The
panel 406 includes apixel portion 412 in which each pixel includes a liquid crystal element, and drivers circuits such as a scanline driver circuit 414 and a signalline driver circuit 413. The full-color image data 410 or themonochrome image data 411 from theselector 403 are supplied to the signalline driver circuit 413. In addition, the driving signals and/or the power supply potential from thecontroller 405 are/is supplied to the scanline driver circuit 414 and/or the signalline driver circuit 413. - Note that the driving signals include a signal line driver circuit start pulse signal (SSP) and a signal line driver circuit clock signal (SCK) which control the operation of the signal
line driver circuit 413; a scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) and a scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK) which control the operation of the scanline driver circuit 414; and the like. - A plurality of light sources which emit lights of different hues are provided in the
backlight 407. Thecontroller 405 controls driving of the light sources included in thebacklight 407 through thebacklight control circuit 408. - Note that switching between full-color image display and monochrome image display can be performed by hand. In that case, an
input device 420 may be provided in the liquidcrystal display device 400 so that theCPU 404 controls the switching in accordance with a signal from theinput device 420. For example, a user controls switching between full-color image display and monochrome image display with the use of a switch or the like provided for the liquidcrystal display device 400. - The liquid
crystal display device 400 described in this embodiment may also include aphotometric circuit 421. Thephotometric circuit 421 measures the brightness of an environment where the liquidcrystal display device 400 is used. TheCPU 404 may control the switching between full-color image display and monochrome image display in accordance with the brightness detected by thephotometric circuit 421. - For example, in the case where the liquid
crystal display device 400 in this embodiment is used in a dim environment, theCPU 404 may select full-color image display in accordance with a signal from thephotometric circuit 421; in the case where the liquidcrystal display device 400 is used in a bright environment, theCPU 404 may select monochrome image display in accordance with a signal from thephotometric circuit 421. Note that a threshold value may be set in thephotometric circuit 421 so that the backlight is turned on when the brightness of a usage environment becomes less than the threshold value. - Next, an example of a specific structure of the panel of the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described.
-
FIG. 2A illustrates a structural example of the liquid crystal display device. The liquid crystal display device illustrated inFIG. 2A includes apixel portion 10, a scanline driver circuit 11, and a signalline driver circuit 12. In one embodiment of the present invention, thepixel portion 10 is divided into a plurality of regions. Specifically, thepixel portion 10 is divided into three regions (aregion 101, aregion 102, and a region 103) inFIG. 2A . Each region includes a plurality ofpixels 15 arranged in a matrix. - In addition, m scan lines GL whose potentials are controlled by the scan
line driver circuit 11, n signal lines SL whose potentials are controlled by the signalline driver circuit 12, and enable lines ENR connected toterminals 61 to 63 are provided for thepixel portion 10. The m scan lines GL are divided into a plurality of groups in accordance with the number of regions of thepixel portion 10. For example, the m scan lines GL are divided into three groups because thepixel portion 10 is divided into three regions inFIG. 2A . The scan lines GL in each group are connected to the plurality ofpixels 15 in each corresponding region. Specifically, each scan line GL is connected ton pixels 15 in each corresponding row among the plurality ofpixels 15 arranged in a matrix in the corresponding region. -
FIG. 2A illustrates a structure in which the enable line ENR included in theregion 101 is connected to the terminal 61, the enable line ENR included in theregion 102 is connected to the terminal 62, and the enable line ENR included in theregion 103 is connected to the terminal 63. A terminal connected to an enable line ENR is provided in each region of thepixel portion 10, whereby a potential supplied to the enable line ENR through the terminal can be controlled in each region. Each of theterminals 61 to 63 may be provided in plural. In particular, when the liquid crystal display device has a larger screen or higher definition, an increase in wiring resistance is likely to cause a voltage drop; however, distribution of each of theterminals 61 to 63 in plural can make a voltage drop due to an increase in wiring resistance less likely to occur. Alternatively, all the enable lines ENR included in thepixel portion 10 can be connected to one terminal. - Regardless of the above regions, each of the signal lines SL is connected to m
pixels 15 in each corresponding column among the plurality ofpixels 15 arranged in a matrix of m rows by n columns in thepixel portion 10. -
FIG. 2B illustrates an example of a circuit configuration of one of thepixels 15 included in the liquid crystal display device illustrated inFIG. 2A . - The
pixel 15 is broadly divided into atransmissive region 13 where light from the backlight is transmitted through a pixel electrode formed using a light-transmitting conductive film and areflective region 14 where a reflective electrode reflects incident light through a liquid crystal layer. Thetransmissive region 13 includes afirst pixel transistor 16 a, a firstliquid crystal element 18 a, and afirst capacitor 17 a. A gate of thefirst pixel transistor 16 a is connected to the scan line GL, a first terminal serving as one of a source and a drain of thefirst pixel transistor 16 a is connected to the signal line SL, a second terminal serving as the other of the source and the drain of thefirst pixel transistor 16 a is connected to one electrode of the firstliquid crystal element 18 a and a first electrode of thefirst capacitor 17 a. The other electrode of the firstliquid crystal element 18 a is connected to a common electrode. A second electrode of thefirst capacitor 17 a is connected to a capacitor line. Thefirst capacitor 17 a functions as a storage capacitor for holding a voltage applied to the firstliquid crystal element 18 a. - The
reflective region 14 includes asecond pixel transistor 16 b, a secondliquid crystal element 18 b, and asecond capacitor 17 b. A gate of thesecond pixel transistor 16 b is connected to an enable line ENR, a first terminal serving as one of a source and a drain of thesecond pixel transistor 16 b is connected to the second terminal of thefirst pixel transistor 16 a, a second terminal serving as the other of the source and the drain of thesecond pixel transistor 16 b is connected to one electrode of the secondliquid crystal element 18 b and a first electrode of thesecond capacitor 17 b. The other electrode of the secondliquid crystal element 18 b is connected to the common electrode. A second electrode of thesecond capacitor 17 b is connected to the capacitor line. Thesecond capacitor 17 b functions as a storage capacitor for holding a voltage applied to the secondliquid crystal element 18 b. - In the
pixel 15 described in this embodiment, when an image is displayed using thereflective region 14, thefirst capacitor 17 a in thetransmissive region 13 can be used as a storage capacitor for holding a voltage applied to the secondliquid crystal element 18 b in thereflective region 14. Thus, a layout area of the storage capacitor can be reduced. - Note that in
FIGS. 2A and 2B , the scan lines GL are driven by the scanline driver circuit 11. In addition, image signals are supplied to the signal lines SL from the signalline driver circuit 12. - In general, a driver circuit needs to be driven at extremely high frequency in the case where field-sequential driving is performed. In order to reduce writing time of an image signal to a pixel, the capacitance of the
first capacitor 17 a in thetransmissive region 13 needs to be reduced. When a still image is displayed, the capacitance of thesecond capacitor 17 b in thereflective region 14 may be increased, so that display of an image can be maintained for a long time. However, when the off-state current of each of the transistors connected to the capacitors is high, the capacitance of thefirst capacitor 17 a and the capacitance of thesecond capacitor 17 b need to be increased more than necessary so that image signals can be surely held. - Accordingly, each of the
first pixel transistor 16 a and thesecond pixel transistor 16 b is preferably a transistor including an oxide semiconductor layer. A transistor including an oxide semiconductor layer has extremely low off-state current, so that the capacitance of thefirst capacitor 17 a and the capacitance of thesecond capacitor 17 b can be reduced. In particular, by use of a transistor having extremely low off-state current as thesecond pixel transistor 16 b, a period during which a voltage applied to the secondliquid crystal element 18 b can be prolonged. Thus, in the case where image signals each having the same image information are written to thepixel portion 10 for some consecutive frame periods, like a still image, display of an image can be maintained even when the driving frequency is low, in other words, the number of writings of image signals to thepixel portion 10 in a certain period is reduced. For example, the above-described transistor in which an oxide semiconductor film which is purified is used as an active layer is employed as thesecond pixel transistor 16 b, whereby an interval between writings of image signals can be increased to 10 seconds or more, preferably 30 seconds or more, further preferably 1 minute or more. As the interval between writings of image signals is made longer, power consumption can be further reduced. - When an image displayed by plural times of writing of an image signal is seen, human eyes see images which are switched plural times. Accordingly, such switching might cause eye strain. With a structure where the number of writings of image signals is reduced as described in this embodiment, eyestrain can be alleviated.
- In addition, the potential of an image signal can be held for a longer period, so that without the
second capacitor 17 b for holding a potential of an image signal connected to the secondliquid crystal element 18 b, the quality of the displayed image can be prevented from being lowered. - As each of the
first pixel transistor 16 a and thesecond pixel transistor 16 b, a transistor including a compound semiconductor such as silicon carbide (SiC) or gallium nitride (GaN) may be used without limitation to a transistor including an oxide semiconductor layer as long as the semiconductor has a wider band gap and a lower intrinsic carrier density than a silicon semiconductor. - Each of the first
liquid crystal element 18 a and the secondliquid crystal element 18 b includes a pixel electrode, a counter electrode, and a liquid crystal layer including a liquid crystal to which a voltage between the pixel electrode and the counter electrode is applied. - As examples of a liquid crystal material used in a liquid crystal layer, the following can be given: a nematic liquid crystal, a cholesteric liquid crystal, a smectic liquid crystal, a discotic liquid crystal, a thermotropic liquid crystal, a lyotropic liquid crystal, a low-molecular liquid crystal, a polymer dispersed liquid crystal (PDLC), a ferroelectric liquid crystal, an anti-ferroelectric liquid crystal, a main-chain liquid crystal, a side-chain high-molecular liquid crystal, a banana-shaped liquid crystal, and the like.
- Alternatively, liquid crystal exhibiting a blue phase for which an alignment film is unnecessary may be used. A blue phase is one of liquid crystal phases, which is generated just before a cholesteric phase changes into an isotropic phase while temperature of cholesteric liquid crystal is increased. Since the blue phase is only generated within a narrow range of temperature, a chiral agent or an ultraviolet curable resin is added so that the temperature range is improved. The liquid crystal composition which includes a liquid crystal showing a blue phase and a chiral agent is preferable, because it has a short response time of greater than or equal to 10 μsec and less than or equal to 100 μsec. Another reason is because it is optically isotropic and therefore alignment treatment is not necessary and viewing angle dependence is small.
- Moreover, the following methods can be used for driving the liquid crystal, for example: a TN (twisted nematic) mode, an STN (super twisted nematic) mode, a VA (vertical alignment) mode, an MVA (multi-domain vertical alignment) mode, an IPS (in-plane-switching) mode, an OCB (optically compensated birefringence) mode, an ECB (electrically controlled birefringence) mode, an FLC (ferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, an AFLC (anti-ferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, a PDLC (polymer dispersed liquid crystal) mode, a PNLC (polymer network liquid crystal) mode, and a guest-host mode.
- Note that the
pixel 15 may further include another circuit element such as a transistor, a diode, a resistor, a capacitor, or an inductor as needed. - By inversion driving in which the polarity of the potential of an image signal is inverted using a potential of a counter electrode as a reference potential, deterioration of a liquid crystal called burn-in can be prevented. However, by the inversion driving, the change in the potential supplied to the signal line is increased at the time of changing the polarity of the image signal; thus, a potential difference between a source electrode and a drain electrode of the
second pixel transistor 16 b is increased. Accordingly, deterioration of characteristics of thesecond pixel transistor 16 b, such as a shift in threshold voltage, is easily caused. In addition, in order to maintain a voltage held in the secondliquid crystal element 18 b, a low off-state current is required even when the potential difference between the source electrode and the drain electrode is large. In this embodiment, a semiconductor such as an oxide semiconductor is used for thesecond pixel transistor 16 b; therefore, the pressure resistance of thesecond pixel transistor 16 b can be increased and the off-state current can be made extremely low. Therefore, in contrast to a transistor formed using a semiconductor material such as silicon or germanium, thesecond pixel transistor 16 b can be prevented from deteriorating and the voltage held in the secondliquid crystal element 18 b can be maintained effectively. - Next, an example of the operation of the panel together with the operation of the backlight will be described.
FIG. 3 schematically shows operations of the liquid crystal display device and operations of the backlight. As shown inFIG. 3 , the operations of the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention is roughly divided into an operation in a period in which a full-color image is displayed (a full-color image display period 301), an operation in a period in which a monochrome moving image is displayed (a monochrome moving image display period 302), and an operation in a period in which a monochrome still image is displayed (a monochrome still image display period 303). - In the full-color
image display period 301, one frame period consists of a plurality of subframe periods. In each of the subframe periods, writings of image signals to the pixel portion is performed. While an image is being displayed, driving signals are successively supplied to the driver circuits such as the scan line driver circuit and the signal line driver circuit. Therefore, the driver circuits are operated in the full-colorimage display period 301. In addition, the hue of the light supplied to the pixel portion from the backlight is switched every subframe period. Image signals corresponding to their respective hues are written to the pixel portion sequentially. The image signals corresponding to all of the hues are written in one frame period, whereby one image is formed. Accordingly, in the full-colorimage display period 301, the number of writings of the image signals to the pixel portion in one frame period is more than one and is determined by the number of the hues of the lights supplied from the backlight. - In the monochrome moving
image display period 302, as in the full-colorimage display period 301, writings of image signals to the pixel portion is performed every frame period. While an image is being displayed, driving signals are successively supplied to the driver circuits such as the scan line driver circuit and the signal line driver circuit. Therefore, the driver circuits are operated in the monochrome movingimage display period 302. In the monochrome movingimage display period 302, the hue of the light supplied to the pixel portion from the backlight is not switched every frame period, and a light of one hue is successively supplied to the pixel portion. One image can be formed by sequentially writing an image signal corresponding to one hue to the pixel portion in one frame period. Accordingly, in the monochrome movingimage display period 302, the number of writings of the image signals to the pixel portion in one frame period is one. - In the monochrome still
image display period 303, as in the full-colorimage display period 301, wirings of image signals to the pixel portion is performed every frame period. However, unlike the full-colorimage display period 301 and the monochrome movingimage display period 302, the driving signals are supplied to the driver circuits during the writings of the image signals to the pixel portion, and after the writings are completed, the supply of the driving signals to the driver circuits is stopped. Therefore, the driver circuits are not operated in the monochrome stillimage display period 303 except during the writings of the image signals. In the monochrome still-image display period 303, the backlight remains off. In addition, one image is formed by sequentially writing image signals to the pixel portion in one frame period. Accordingly, in the monochrome stillimage display period 303, the number of writings of the image signals to the pixel portion in one frame period is one. - Note that it is preferable that 60 or more frame periods be provided in one second in the monochrome moving
image display period 302 in order to prevent a flicker of an image or the like from being perceived. In the monochrome stillimage display period 303, one frame period can be extremely prolonged to, for example, one minute or longer. When one frame period is long, the period in which the driver circuits are not operated can be long, so that power consumption of the liquid crystal display device can be reduced. - The liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention does not need to be provided with a color filter. Therefore, the cost can be lower than that of a liquid crystal display device including a color filter.
- Note that a plurality of lights having different hues are supplied sequentially to each region of the pixel portion in one frame period in the full-color
image display period 301.FIGS. 4A to 4C schematically illustrate an example of the hues of lights supplied to the regions. Note thatFIGS. 4A to 4C illustrate the case where the pixel portion is divided into three regions as inFIG. 2A . Further,FIGS. 4A to 4C illustrate the case where the backlight supplies lights of red (R), blue (B), and green (G) to the pixel portion. - First,
FIG. 4A shows the first subframe period in which a light of red (R) is supplied to theregion 101, a light of green (G) is supplied to theregion 102, and a light of blue (B) is supplied to theregion 103.FIG. 4B shows the second subframe period in which a light of green (G) is supplied to theregion 101, a light of blue (B) is supplied to theregion 102, and a light of red (R) is supplied to theregion 103.FIG. 4C shows the third subframe period, in which a light of blue (B) is supplied to theregion 101, a light of red (R) is supplied to theregion 102, and a light of green (G) is supplied to theregion 103. - The completion of the above subframe periods corresponds to the completion of one frame period. In one frame period, each hue of lights supplied to the regions takes a round of the regions, with which a full-color image can be displayed. In the
regions - Note that
FIGS. 4A to 4C illustrate the example in which a light having one hue is supplied to one region in each subframe; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, the hues of the lights supplied to the regions may be changed in order of completion of the writing of the image signal. In that case, a region irradiated with the light of the hue does not necessarily correspond to the region formed by dividing the pixel portion. - In the monochrome moving-
image display period 302 and the monochrome still-image display period 303, all of the plurality of lights of different hues remain off. An example of turning off of the lights in each region is schematically shown inFIG. 5 . Note thatFIG. 5 shows an example in which the pixel portion is divided into three regions as inFIG. 2A . As shown inFIG. 5 , all the light sources of the backlight are off in theregions -
FIG. 6 illustrates a configuration example of the scanline driver circuit 11 illustrated inFIG. 2A . The scanline driver circuit 11 inFIG. 6 includes first to m-th pulse output circuits 20_1 to 20_m. Selection signals are output from the first to m-th pulse output circuits 20_1 to 20_m and supplied to m scan lines GL (scan lines GL1 to GLm). - First to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK1 to GCK4), first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC1 to PWC6), and the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) are supplied as driving signals to the scan
line driver circuit 11. - Note that
FIG. 6 illustrates the case where the first to j-th pulse output circuits 20_1 to 20_j (j is a multiple of 4 and less than m/2) are connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLj provided in theregion 101, respectively. Further, the (j+1)-th to 2j-th pulse output circuits 20_j+1 to 20_2j are connected to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j provided in theregion 102, respectively. Further, the (2j+1)-th to m-th pulse output circuits 20_2j+1 to 20_m are connected to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GLm provided in theregion 103, respectively. - The first to m-th pulse output circuits 20_1 to 20_m begin to operate in response to the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) that is input to the first pulse output circuit 20_1, and output selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially.
- Circuits having the same configuration can be applied to the first to m-th pulse output circuits 20_1 to 20_m. A specific connection relation of the first to m-th pulse output circuits 20_1 to 20_m is described with reference to
FIG. 7 . -
FIG. 7 schematically illustrates the x-th pulse output circuit 20_x (x is a natural number less than or equal to m). Each of the first to m-th pulse output circuits 20_1 to 20_m hasterminals 21 to 27. Theterminals 21 to 24 and the terminal 26 are input terminals, and theterminals - First, the terminal 21 is described. The terminal 21 of the first pulse output circuit 20_1 is connected to a wiring for supplying the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP). The terminal 21 of each of the second to m-th pulse output circuits 20_2 to 20_m is connected to the
terminal 27 of each corresponding previous-stage pulse output circuit. - Next, the terminal 22 is described. The terminal 22 of the (4a−3)-th pulse output circuit 20_(4a−3) (a is a natural number less than or equal to m/4) is connected to a wiring for supplying the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK1). The terminal 22 of the (4a−2)-th pulse output circuit 20_(4a−2) is connected to a wiring for supplying the second scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK2). The terminal 22 of the (4a−1)-th pulse output circuit 20_(4a−1) is connected to a wiring for supplying the third scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK3). The terminal 22 of the 4a-th pulse output circuit 20_4a is connected to a wiring for supplying the fourth scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK4).
- Then, the terminal 23 is described. The terminal 23 of the (4a−3)-th pulse output circuit 20_(4a−3) is connected to the wiring for supplying the second scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK2). The terminal 23 of the (4a−2)-th pulse output circuit 20_(4a−2) is connected to the wiring for supplying the third scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK3). The terminal 23 of the (4a−1)-th pulse output circuit 20_(4a−1) is connected to the wiring for supplying the fourth scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK4). The terminal 23 of the 4a-th pulse output circuit 20_4a is connected to the wiring for supplying the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK1).
- Next, the terminal 24 is described. The terminal 24 of the (2b−1)-th pulse output circuit 20_(2b−1) (b is a natural number less than or equal to j/2) is connected to a wiring for supplying the first pulse width control signal (PWC1). The terminal 24 of the 2b-th pulse output circuit 20_2b is connected to a wiring for supplying the fourth pulse width control signal (PWC4). The terminal 24 of the (2c−1)-th pulse output circuit 20_(2c−1) (c is a natural number greater than or equal to (j/2+1) and less than or equal to j) is connected to a wiring for supplying the second pulse width control signal (PWC2). The terminal 24 of the 2c-th pulse output circuit 20_2c is connected to a wiring for supplying the fifth pulse width control signal (PWC5). The terminal 24 of the (2d−1)-th pulse output circuit 20_(2d−1) (d is a natural number greater than or equal to (j+1) and less than or equal to m/2) is connected to a wiring for supplying the third pulse width control signal (PWC3). The terminal 24 of the 2d-th pulse output circuit 20_2d is connected to a wiring for supplying the sixth pulse width control signal (PWC6).
- Then, the terminal 25 is described. The terminal 25 of the x-th pulse output circuit 20_x is connected to the scan line GLx in the x-th row.
- Next, the terminal 26 is described. The terminal 26 of the y-th pulse output circuit 20_y (y is a natural number less than or equal to (m−1)) is connected to the
terminal 27 of the (y+1)-th pulse output circuit 20_(y+1). The terminal 26 of the m-th pulse output circuit 20_m is connected to a wiring for supplying a stop signal (STP) for the m-th pulse output circuit. In the case where a (m+1)-th pulse output circuit is provided, the stop signal (STP) for the m-th pulse output circuit corresponds to a signal output from theterminal 27 of the (m+1)-th pulse output circuit 20_(m+1). Specifically, these signals can be supplied to the m-th pulse output circuit 20_m by providing the (m+1)-th pulse output circuit 20_(m+1) as a dummy circuit or by directly inputting these signals from the outside. - The connection relation of the terminal 27 in each of the pulse output circuits has been described above. Therefore, the above description is to be referred to.
- Next,
FIG. 8A illustrates an example of a specific configuration of the x-th pulse output circuit 20_x illustrated inFIG. 7 . The pulse output circuit illustrated inFIG. 8A includestransistors 31 to 39. - A gate electrode of the
transistor 31 is connected to the terminal 21. A first terminal of thetransistor 31 is connected to a node supplied with a high power supply potential (Vdd). A second terminal of thetransistor 31 is connected to a gate electrode of thetransistor 33 and a gate electrode of thetransistor 38. - A gate electrode of the
transistor 32 is connected to a gate electrode of thetransistor 34 and a gate electrode of thetransistor 39. A first terminal of thetransistor 32 is connected to a node supplied with a low power supply potential (Vss). A second terminal of thetransistor 32 is connected to the gate electrode of thetransistor 33 and the gate electrode of thetransistor 38. - A first terminal of the
transistor 33 is connected to the terminal 22. A second terminal of thetransistor 33 is connected to the terminal 27. - A first terminal of the
transistor 34 is connected to the node supplied with the low power supply potential (Vss). A second terminal of thetransistor 34 is connected to the terminal 27. - A gate electrode of the
transistor 35 is connected to the terminal 21. A first terminal of thetransistor 35 is connected to the node supplied with the low power supply potential (Vss). A second terminal of thetransistor 35 is connected to the gate electrode of thetransistor 34 and the gate electrode of thetransistor 39. - A gate electrode of the
transistor 36 is connected to the terminal 26. A first terminal of thetransistor 36 is connected to the node supplied with the high power supply potential (Vdd). A second terminal of thetransistor 36 is connected to the gate electrode of thetransistor 34 and the gate electrode of thetransistor 39. Note that it is possible to employ a structure in which the first terminal of thetransistor 36 is connected to a node supplied with a power supply potential (Vcc) which is higher than the low power supply potential (Vss) and lower than the high power supply potential (Vdd). - A gate electrode of the
transistor 37 is connected to the terminal 23. A first terminal of thetransistor 37 is connected to the node supplied with the high power supply potential (Vdd). A second terminal of thetransistor 37 is connected to the gate electrode of thetransistor 34 and the gate electrode of thetransistor 39. Note that the first terminal of thetransistor 37 may be connected to the node supplied with the power supply potential (Vcc). - A first terminal of the
transistor 38 is connected to the terminal 24. A second terminal of thetransistor 38 is connected to the terminal 25. - A first terminal of the
transistor 39 is connected to the node supplied with the low power supply potential (Vss). A second terminal of thetransistor 39 is connected to the terminal 25. - Next,
FIG. 8B shows an example of a timing diagram of the pulse output circuit illustrated inFIG. 8A . Periods t1 to t7 shown inFIG. 8B have the same length of time. The length of each of the periods t1 to t7 corresponds to ⅓ of a pulse width of each of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK1 to GCK4), and corresponds to ½ of a pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC1 to PWC6). - In the pulse output circuit illustrated in
FIG. 8A , a potential input to the terminal 21 is at a high level and potentials input to the terminal 22, the terminal 23, the terminal 24, and the terminal 26 are at a low level in the periods t1 and t2. Consequently, low-level potentials are output from the terminal 25 and the terminal 27. - Next, in the period t3, the potentials input to the terminal 21 and the terminal 24 are at a high level and the potentials input to the terminal 22, the terminal 23, and the terminal 26 are at a low level. Consequently, a high-level potential is output from the terminal 25 and a low-level potential is output from the terminal 27.
- Subsequently, in the period t4, the potentials input to the terminal 22 and the terminal 24 are at a high level and the potentials input to the terminal 21, the terminal 23, and the terminal 26 are at a low level. Consequently, high-level potentials are output from the terminal 25 and the terminal 27.
- In the periods t5 and t6, the potential input to the terminal 22 is at a high level and the potentials input to the terminal 21, the terminal 23, the terminal 24, and the terminal 26 are at a low level. Consequently, a low-level potential is output from the terminal 25 and a high-level potential is output from the terminal 27.
- In the period t7, the potentials input to the terminal 23 and the terminal 26 are at a high level and the potentials input to the terminal 21, the terminal 22, and the terminal 24 are at a low level. Consequently, low-level potentials are output from the terminal 25 and the terminal 27.
- Next,
FIG. 8C shows another example of the timing diagram of the pulse output circuit illustrated inFIG. 8A . Periods t1 to t7 inFIG. 8C have the same length of time. The length of each of the periods t1 to t7 corresponds to ⅓ of the pulse width of each of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK1 to GCK4), and corresponds to ⅓ of the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC1 to PWC6). - In the pulse output circuit illustrated in
FIG. 8A , the potential input to the terminal 21 is at a high level and the potentials input to the terminal 22, the terminal 23, the terminal 24, and the terminal 26 are at a low level in the periods t1 to t3. Consequently, low-level potentials are output from the terminal 25 and the terminal 27. - Then, in the periods t4 to t6, the potentials input to the terminal 22 and the terminal 24 are at a high level, and the potentials input to the terminal 21, the terminal 23, and the terminal 26 are at a low level. Consequently, high level potentials are output from the terminal 25 and the terminal 27.
- Next, the operation of the scan
line driver circuit 11 in the full-colorimage display period 301 shown inFIG. 3 will be described, for example, using the scanline driver circuit 11 described with reference toFIG. 6 ,FIG. 7 , andFIG. 8A . -
FIG. 9 shows an example of a timing diagram of the scanline driver circuit 11 in the full-colorimage display period 301. A subframe period SF1, a subframe period SF2, a subframe period SF3, and a subframe period SFK are provided in one frame period inFIG. 9 . InFIG. 9 , a timing diagram of the subframe period SF1 is used as a typical example. Note thatFIG. 9 shows an example of the case of m=3j. - In
FIG. 9 , the scan lines GL1 to GLj are connected to the pixels of theregion 101, the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j are connected to the pixels of theregion 102, and the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j are connected to the pixels of theregion 103. - The first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK1) periodically repeats a high-level potential (the high power supply potential (Vdd)) and a low-level potential (the low power supply potential (Vss)), and has a duty ratio of ¼. Further, the second scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK2) is a signal whose phase lags behind that of the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK1) by ¼ of its cycle, the third scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK3) is a signal whose phase lags behind that of the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK1) by ½ of its cycle, and the fourth scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK4) is a signal whose phase lags behind that of the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK1) by ¾ of its cycle.
- The first pulse width control signal (PWC1) periodically repeats a high-level potential (the high power supply potential (Vdd)) and a low-level potential (the low power supply potential (Vss)), and has a duty ratio of ⅓. The second pulse width control signal (PWC2) is a signal whose phase lags behind the first pulse width control signal (PWC1) by ⅙ of its cycle, the third pulse width control signal (PWC3) is a signal whose phase lags behind the first pulse width control signal (PWC1) by ⅓ of its cycle, the fourth pulse width control signal (PWC4) is a signal whose phase lags behind the first pulse width control signal (PWC1) by ½ of its cycle, the fifth pulse width control signal (PWC5) is a signal whose phase lags behind the first pulse width control signal (PWC1) by ⅔ of its cycle, and the sixth pulse width control signal (PWC6) is a signal whose phase lags behind the first pulse width control signal (PWC1) by ⅚ of its cycle.
- In
FIG. 9 , the ratio of the pulse width of each of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK1 to GCK4) to the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC1 to PWC6) is 3:2. - Each of the subframe periods SF starts in response to falling of the potential of the pulse of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP). The pulse width of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK1 to GCK4). The falling of the potential of the pulse of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) is synchronized with rising of the potential of the pulse of the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK1). The falling of the potential of the pulse of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) lags behind rising of the potential of the pulse of the first pulse width control signal (PWC1) by ⅙ of a cycle of the first pulse width control signal (PWC1).
- The pulse output circuit illustrated in
FIG. 8A is operated by the above signals in accordance with the timing diagram inFIG. 8B . Accordingly, as illustrated inFIG. 9 , the selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are supplied to the scan lines GL1 to GLj for theregion 101. Further, the phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL1 to GLj are each shifted by a period corresponding to 3/2 of the pulse width. Note that the pulse width of each of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL1 to GLj is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC1 to PWC6). - As in the case of the
region 101, selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are supplied to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j for theregion 102. Further, the phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j are each shifted by a period corresponding to 3/2 of the pulse width. Note that the pulse width of each of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC1 to PWC6). - As in the case of the
region 101, selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are supplied to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j for theregion 103. Further, the phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j are each shifted by a period corresponding to 3/2 of the pulse width. Note that the pulse width of each of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC1 to PWC6). - The phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL1, GLj+1, and GL2j+1 are shifted sequentially by a period corresponding to ½ of the pulse width.
- In the subframe period SFK, a selection signal is supplied to the enable lines ENR, so that all the
second pixel transistors 16 b in thepixel portion 10 are turned on. Then, the scan lines GL1 to GLm are selected, to which potentials for displaying black in thereflective region 14 are supplied from the signal lines SL1 to SLn through thefirst pixel transistors 16 a and thesecond pixel transistors 16 b. After that, the potentials of the enable lines ENR are set to potentials for turning off thesecond pixel transistors 16 b. - Next, the operation of the scan
line driver circuit 11 in the monochrome stillimage display period 303 shown inFIG. 3 will be described. -
FIG. 10 shows an example of a timing diagram of the scanline driver circuit 11 in the monochrome stillimage display period 303. InFIG. 10 , a writing period in which writings of image signals to pixels are performed and a holding period in which the image signals are held are provided in one frame period. - During the monochrome still
image display period 303, all the enable lines ENR are always selected, so that all thesecond pixel transistors 16 b remain on. - The first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK1 to GCK4) are the same signals as those in the case of
FIG. 9 . - The first pulse width control signal (PWC1) and the fourth pulse width control signal (PWC4) periodically repeat a high-level potential (the high power supply potential (Vdd)) and a low-level potential (the low power supply potential (Vss)) and have a duty ratio of ½ in the first ⅓ period of the writing period. Further, in the other periods in the writing period, the first pulse width control signal (PWC1) and the fourth pulse width control signal (PWC4) have the low-level potentials. The fourth pulse width control signal (PWC4) is a signal whose phase lags behind that of the first pulse width control signal (PWC1) by ½ of its cycle.
- The second pulse width control signal (PWC2) and the fifth pulse width control signal (PWC5) periodically repeat a high-level potential (the high power supply potential (Vdd)) and a low-level potential (the low power supply potential (Vss)) and have a duty ratio of ½ in the middle ⅓ period of the writing period. In the other periods in the writing period, the second pulse width control signal (PWC2) and the fifth pulse width control signal (PWC5) have the low-level potential. The fifth pulse width control signal (PWC5) is a signal whose phase lags behind the second pulse width control signal (PWC2) by ½ of its cycle.
- The third pulse width control signal (PWC3) and the sixth pulse width control signal (PWC6) periodically repeat a high-level potential (the high power supply potential (Vdd)) and a low-level potential (the low power supply potential (Vss)) and have a duty ratio of ½ in the last ⅓ period of the writing period. In the other periods in the writing period, the third pulse width control signal (PWC3) and the sixth pulse width control signal (PWC6) have the low-level potential. The sixth pulse width control signal (PWC6) is a signal whose phase lags behind the third pulse width control signal (PWC3) by ½ of its cycle.
- In
FIG. 10 , the ratio of the pulse width of each of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK1 to GCK4) with respect to the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC1 to PWC6) is 1:1. - A frame period F starts in response to falling of the potential of the pulse of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP). The pulse width of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK1 to GCK4). The falling of the potential of the pulse of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) is synchronized with rising of the potential of the pulse of the first scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK1). In addition, the falling of the potential of the pulse of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) is synchronized with rising of the potential of a pulse of the first pulse width control signal (PWC1).
- The pulse output circuit illustrated in
FIG. 8A is operated by the above signals in accordance with the timing diagram inFIG. 8C . Accordingly, as shown inFIG. 10 , the selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are supplied to the scan lines GL1 to GLj for theregion 101. Further, the phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL1 to GLj are each shifted by a period corresponding to the pulse width. Note that the pulse width of each of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL1 to GLj is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC1 to PWC6). - After the selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are supplied to all of the scan lines GL1 to GLj for the
region 101, the selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are also supplied to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j for theregion 102. The phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j are each shifted by a period corresponding to the pulse width. Note that the pulse width of each of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC1 to PWC6). - After the selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are supplied to all of the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j for the
region 102, the selection signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially are also supplied to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j for theregion 103. Further, the phases of the pulses of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j are each shifted by a period corresponding to the pulse width. Note that the pulse width of each of the selection signals supplied to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j is substantially the same as the pulse width of each of the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC1 to PWC6). - Next, in the holding period, supply of the driving signals and the power supply potential to the scan
line driver circuit 11 is stopped. Specifically, first, supply of the scan line driver circuit start pulse signal (GSP) is stopped, whereby output of the selection signal from the pulse output circuit is stopped in the scanline driver circuit 11, and selection by the pulse in all of the scan lines connected to the scanline driver circuit 11 is terminated. After that, supply of the power supply potential Vdd to the scanline driver circuit 11 is stopped. Note that to stop input or to stop supply means, for example, to make a floating state of a wiring to which a signal or a potential is input, or to apply a low-level potential to a wiring to which a signal or a potential is input. By the above-described method, malfunction of the scanline driver circuit 11 in stopping operation can be prevented. In addition, supply of the first to fourth scan line driver circuit clock signals (GCK1 to GCK4) and the first to sixth pulse width control signals (PWC1 to PWC6) to the scanline driver circuit 11 may be stopped. - By stopping the supply of the driving signals and the power supply potential to the scan
line driver circuit 11, low-level potentials are supplied to all of the scan lines GL1 to GLj, the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j, and the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j. - Note that in the monochrome moving
image display period 302, the operation of the scanline driver circuit 11 in the writing period is the same as that in the monochrome stillimage display period 303. -
FIG. 11 illustrates a structural example of the signalline driver circuit 12 included in the liquid crystal display device inFIG. 2A . The signalline driver circuit 12 includes ashift register 120 having first to n-th output terminals and aswitching element group 123 which controls supply of image signals (DATA) to the signal lines SL1 to SLn. - Specifically, the switching
element group 123 includes transistors 121_1 to 121_n. First terminals of the transistors 121_1 to 121_n are connected to a wiring for supplying the image signals (DATA). Second terminals of the transistors 121_1 to 121_n are connected to the signal lines SL1 to SLn, respectively. Gate electrodes of the transistors 121_1 to 121_n are connected to the first to n-th output terminals of theshift register 120, respectively. - The
shift register 120 operates in accordance with a driving signal such as a signal line driver circuit start pulse signal (SSP) and a signal line driver circuit clock signal (SCK), and outputs signals whose pulses are shifted sequentially from the first to n-th output terminals. The signals are input to the gate electrodes of the transistors 121_1 to 121_n to turn on the transistors 121_1 to 121_n sequentially. -
FIG. 12A shows an example of the timing of image signals (DATA) supplied to the signal lines in the full-colorimage display period 301. As shown inFIG. 12A , in a period in which pulses of selection signals input to two scan lines overlap with each other, an image signal (DATA) for the scan line whose pulse appears first is sampled and input to the signal lines in the signalline driver circuit 12 illustrated inFIG. 11 . Specifically, the pulse of the selection signal input to the scan line GL1 and the pulse of the selection signal input to the scanline GLj+ 1 overlap with each other in a period t4 corresponding to ½ of the pulse width. Note that the pulse of the scan line GL1 appears before the pulse of the scanline GLj+ 1. In the period in which the pulses overlap with each other, an image signal (data1) among the image signals (DATA) for the scan line GL1 is sampled and input to the signal lines SL1 to SLn. - In a similar manner, in a period t5, an image signal (dataj+1) for the scan
line GLj+ 1 is sampled and input to the signal lines SL1 to SLn. In a period t6, an image signal (data2j+1) for the scanline GL2j+ 1 is sampled and input to the signal lines SL1 to SLn. In a period t7, an image signal (data2) for the scan line GL2 is sampled and input to the signal lines SL1 to SLn. Also in a period t8 and subsequent periods, the same operation is repeated and image signals (DATA) are written to the pixel portion. - In other words, input of the image signals to the signal lines SL1 to SLn is performed in the following order: pixels connected to the scan line GLs (s is a natural number less than j); pixels connected to the scan line GLj+s; pixels connected to the scan line GL2j+s; and pixels connected to the scan
line GLs+ 1. -
FIG. 12B shows an example of the timing of the image signals (DATA) supplied to the signal lines in the writing period provided in the monochrome movingimage display period 302 and the monochrome stillimage display period 303. As shown inFIG. 12B , in a period in which a pulse of a selection signal input to the scan line appears, the image signal (DATA) to the scan line is sampled and input to the signal lines in the writing period provided in the monochrome movingimage display period 302 and the monochrome stillimage display period 303. Specifically, in a period in which the pulse of the selection signal input to the scan line GL1 appears, the image signal (data1) among the image signals (DATA) for the scan line GL1 is sampled and input to the signal lines SL1 to SLn. - The same operation is repeated in all of the scan lines subsequent to the scan line GL1, whereby image signals (DATA) are written to the pixel portion.
- In the holding period in the monochrome still
image display period 303, supply of the signal line driver circuit start pulse signal (SSP) to theshift register 120 and supply of the image signals (DATA) to the signalline driver circuit 12 are stopped. Specifically, first, the supply of the signal line driver circuit start pulse signal (SSP) is stopped to stop sampling of an image signal in the signalline driver circuit 12. Then, the supply of the image signals and the supply of the power supply potential to the signalline driver circuit 12 are stopped. By the above-described method, malfunction of the signalline driver circuit 12 in stopping operation can be prevented. In addition, supply of the signal line driver circuit clock signal (SCK) to the signalline driver circuit 12 may be stopped. -
FIG. 13 shows the timing of scanning of the selection signals and the timing of lighting of the backlight in the full-colorimage display period 301 in the above-described liquid crystal display device. Note that inFIG. 13 , the vertical axis represents rows in the pixel portion, and the horizontal axis represents time. - As shown in
FIG. 13 , in the liquid crystal display device described in this embodiment, a driving method in which a selection signal is supplied to the scan line GL1 and then a selection signal is supplied to the scanline GLj+ 1, which is the j-th rows from the scan line GL1, can be used in the full-colorimage display period 301. Therefore, the image signals can be supplied to the pixels in one subframe period SF in such a manner that n pixels connected to the scan line GL1 to n pixels connected to the scan line GLj are sequentially selected, n pixels connected to the scan line GLj+1 to n pixels connected to the scan line GL2j are sequentially selected, and n pixels connected to the scan line GL2j+1 to n pixels connected to the scan line GL3j are sequentially selected. - Specifically, in a first subframe period SF1 in
FIG. 13 , image signals for red (R) are written in the pixels connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLj, and then a light of red (R) is supplied to the pixels connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLj. With the above structure, an image for red (R) can be displayed in theregion 101 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL1 to GLj. - Further, in the first subframe period SF1, image signals for green (G) are written in the pixels connected to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j, and then a light of green (G) is supplied to the pixels connected to the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j. With the above structure, an image for green (G) can be displayed in the
region 102 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j. - Further, in the first subframe period SF1, image signals for blue (B) are written in the pixels connected to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j, and then a light of blue (B) is supplied to the pixels connected to the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j. With the above structure, an image for blue (B) can be displayed in the
region 103 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j. - The same operation as in the first subframe period SF1 is repeated in a second subframe period SF2 and a third subframe period SF3. Note that in the second subframe period SF2, an image for blue (B) is displayed in the
region 101 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL1 to GLj; an image for red (R) is displayed in theregion 102 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j; and an image for green (G) is displayed in theregion 103 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j. In the third subframe period SF3, an image for green (G) is displayed in theregion 101 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL1 to GLj; an image for blue (B) is displayed in theregion 102 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j; and an image for red (R) is displayed in theregion 103 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j. - In a subframe period SFK, the backlight is turned off, a selection signal is supplied to the enable line ENR in the
region 101 through the terminal 61, and image signals for black (K) are written to theregion 101 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL1 to GLj. A selection signal is supplied to the enable line ENR in theregion 102 through the terminal 62, and image signals for black (K) are written to theregion 102 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GLj+1 to GL2j. Further, a selection signal is supplied to the enable line ENR in theregion 103 through the terminal 63, and image signals for black (K) are written to theregion 103 of the pixel portion for the scan lines GL2j+1 to GL3j. - In the above manner, the first to third subframe periods SF1 to SF3 and the subframe period SFK in all of the scan lines GL are terminated, that is, one frame period is completed, whereby a full-color image can be displayed in the pixel portion.
- Alternatively, it is also possible to write image signals for black (K) to all the
pixels 15 in thepixel portion 10 at once, instead of writing image signals for black (K) to each region. In that case, the backlight of theregion 101 is turned off after the third frame period SF3 is terminated in theregion 101, the backlight of theregion 102 is turned off after the third frame period SF3 is terminated in theregion 102, and the backlight of theregion 103 is turned off after the third frame period SF3 is terminated in theregion 103. After the backlight is turned off in all the regions, a selection signal is supplied to all the enable lines ENR, the scan lines GL1 to GL3j are selected, and image signals for black (K) are written to all thepixels 15. - In order to write image signals for black (K) to all the
pixels 15 in thepixel portion 10 at once, periods are needed in which the subframe periods SFK of theregions 101 to 103 overlap with each other. Accordingly, the backlight remains off for a long time in each region. This becomes a factor of a decrease in visibility, such as a decrease in luminance and a flicker phenomenon. For improvement of visibility, the driver circuits and the pixel transistors are required to be operated at even higher speed. - On the other hand, in the case where image signals for black (K) are written in the subframe period SFK for each region instead of writing image signals for black (K) to all the
pixels 15 in thepixel portion 10 at once, a period during which the backlight remains off in each region can be shortened to the minimum. Further, since there is no period in which the backlight of thepixel portion 10 is entirely turned off, a decrease in visibility such as a decrease in luminance and a flicker phenomenon is less likely to be caused. - During the full-color
image display period 301, an image is displayed using the backlight. Accordingly, an image is displayed using thetransmissive region 13 without using thereflective region 14, in thepixel 15. It is possible to employ the following structure: thesecond pixel transistor 16 b is not provided in thereflective region 14, and one electrode of the secondliquid crystal element 18 b and the first electrode of thesecond capacitor 17 b in thereflective region 14 are connected to the second terminal of thefirst pixel transistor 16 a in thetransmissive region 13. In that case, however, image signals are written to thesecond capacitor 17 b and the secondliquid crystal element 18 b which do not contribute to display in the full-colorimage display period 301, whereby power consumption and writing time are increased. - In the
pixel 15 of this embodiment, thesecond pixel transistor 16 b is provided in thereflective region 14 and is turned off during the full-colorimage display period 301, so that increase in power consumption can be suppressed and writing time of an image signal can be reduced. A subframe period SFK is provided in each frame period, during which an image signal of black is held in thereflective region 14, so that a decrease in contrast due to reflection of external light at thereflective region 14 during the full-colorimage display period 301 can be prevented. - This embodiment describes a structure in which a subframe period SFK is provided every one frame; however, by using a transistor including an oxide semiconductor layer as the
second pixel transistor 16 b, the writing interval of image signals to thereflective region 14 by a subframe period SFK can be as long as several hundreds of frames or several thousands of frames; thus, power consumption can be further suppressed. - Note that in one embodiment of the present invention, each of the regions may be further divided into regions. In the divided regions, lighting of the backlight may start sequentially in response to the termination of writings of image signals. For example, the following method may be employed: in the
region 101, image signals for red (R) are written to the pixels connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLh (h is a natural number less than or equal to j/4); and then, a light of red (R) is supplied to the pixels connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLh while image signals for red (R) are written to the pixels connected to the scan lines GLh+1 to GL2h. -
FIG. 14 shows the timing of scanning of the selection signals and the timing of turning off of the backlight in the monochrome stillimage display period 303 in the above-described liquid crystal display device. Note that inFIG. 14 , the vertical axis represents the row in the pixel portion, and the horizontal axis represents time. - As shown in
FIG. 14 , the selection signals are supplied sequentially to the scan lines GL1 to GL3j in the monochrome stillimage display period 303 in the liquid crystal display device described in this embodiment. - Specifically, in
FIG. 14 , after a selection signal is supplied to all the enable lines ENR, so that all thesecond pixel transistors 16 b are turned on, and image signals are written topixels 15 connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLh for theregion 101, at the same time as writings of image signals topixels 15 connected to the scan lines GLh+1 to GL2h, supply of light from the light sources to thepixels 15 connected to the scan lines GL1 to GLh is stopped. As a result, image data are written to thereflective regions 14 of thepixels 15, and a monochrome image can be displayed in thepixel portion 10 by utilizing external light. - Note that in the case of the monochrome moving
image display period 302, after the above operations are performed in the pixels connected to the scan lines GL1 to GL3j, the same operation may be repeated again, so that a monochrome image is displayed in the pixel portion continually. -
FIG. 15A illustrates another configuration example of the pulse output circuit. The pulse output circuit illustrated inFIG. 15A includes atransistor 50 in addition to the configuration of the pulse output circuit illustrated inFIG. 8A . A first terminal of thetransistor 50 is connected to the node supplied with the high power supply potential. A second terminal of thetransistor 50 is connected to the gate electrode of thetransistor 32, the gate electrode of thetransistor 34, and the gate electrode of thetransistor 39. A gate electrode of thetransistor 50 is connected to a reset terminal (Reset). - A high-level potential is input to the reset terminal in a period which follows the round of switching of hues of the backlight in the pixel portion; a low-level potential is input in the other periods. Note that the
transistor 50 is turned on when a high-level potential is input. Thus, the potential of each node can be initialized in the period after the backlight is turned on, so that malfunction can be prevented. - Note that in the case where the initialization is performed, it is necessary to provide an initialization period between periods in each of which an image is formed in the pixel portion. In addition, in the case where the backlight is turned off after one image is formed in the pixel portion, the initialization can be performed in the period in which the backlight is off.
-
FIG. 15B illustrates another configuration example of the pulse output circuit. The pulse output circuit illustrated inFIG. 15B includes atransistor 51 in addition to the configuration of the pulse output circuit illustrated inFIG. 8A . A first terminal of thetransistor 51 is connected to the second terminal of thetransistor 31 and the second terminal of thetransistor 32. A second terminal of thetransistor 51 is connected to the gate electrode of thetransistor 33 and the gate electrode of thetransistor 38. A gate electrode of thetransistor 51 is connected to the node supplied with the high power supply potential. - Note that the
transistor 51 is off in the periods t1 to t6 shown inFIGS. 8B and 8C . Therefore, with the configuration including thetransistor 51, the gate electrode of thetransistor 33 and the gate electrode of thetransistor 38 can be disconnected to the second terminal of thetransistor 31 and the second terminal of thetransistor 32 in the periods t1 to t6. Thus, a load at the time of the bootstrapping in the pulse output circuit can be reduced in the periods t1 to t6. -
FIG. 16A illustrates another configuration example of the pulse output circuit. The pulse output circuit illustrated inFIG. 16A includes atransistor 52 in addition to the configuration of the pulse output circuit illustrated inFIG. 15B . A first terminal of thetransistor 52 is connected to the gate electrode of thetransistor 33 and the second terminal of thetransistor 51. A second terminal of thetransistor 52 is connected to the gate electrode of thetransistor 38. A gate electrode of thetransistor 52 is connected to the node supplied with the high power supply potential. - A load at the time of the bootstrapping in the pulse output circuit can be reduced with the
transistor 52. In particular, the effect of reducing the load is enhanced in the case where the potential of a node connected to the gate electrode of thetransistor 33 is increased simply by capacitive coupling of the source electrode and the gate electrode of thetransistor 33 in the pulse output circuit. -
FIG. 16B illustrates another configuration example of the pulse output circuit. The pulse output circuit illustrated inFIG. 16B includes atransistor 53 in addition to the configuration of the pulse output circuit illustrated inFIG. 16A and does not include thetransistor 51. A first terminal of thetransistor 53 is connected to the second terminal of thetransistor 31, the second terminal of thetransistor 32, and the first terminal of thetransistor 52. A second terminal of thetransistor 53 is connected to the gate electrode of thetransistor 33. A gate electrode of thetransistor 53 is connected to the node supplied with the high power supply potential. - With the
transistor 53, a load at the time of the bootstrapping in the pulse output circuit can be reduced. Further, an adverse effect of an irregular pulse generated in the pulse output circuit on the switching of thetransistor 33 and thetransistor 38 can be reduced. - As described in this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention performs color image display in such a manner that the pixel portion is divided into a plurality of regions and lights having different hues are sequentially supplied per region. At each time, the hues of the lights supplied to the adjacent regions can be different from each other. Accordingly, the images of different colors can be prevented from being perceived separately without being synthesized, and a color break, which is likely to occur when a moving image is displayed, can be prevented.
- Note that in the case where a color image is displayed using a plurality of light sources having different hues, it is necessary to sequentially switch the plurality of light sources when light emission is performed unlike in the case where a light source of a single color and a color filter are used in combination. In addition, a frequency at which the light sources are switched needs be higher than a frame frequency in the case of using a single-color light source. For example, when the frame frequency in the case of using the single-color light source is 60 Hz, in the case where field-sequential driving is performed using light sources corresponding to colors of red, green, and blue, the frequency at which the light sources are switched is about three times as high as the frame frequency, i.e., 180 Hz. Accordingly, the driver circuits, which are operated in accordance with the frequency of the light sources, are operated at an extremely high frequency. Therefore, power consumption in the driver circuits tends to be higher than in the case of using the combination of the single-color light source and the color filter.
- However, in one embodiment of the present invention, the transistor whose off-state current is extremely low is used, whereby the period in which a voltage applied to the liquid crystal element is held can be longer. Therefore, the driving frequency of a still image display can be lower than that of moving image display. Accordingly, it is possible to obtain a liquid crystal display device whose power consumption is reduced.
- In this embodiment, a manufacturing method of a transistor including an oxide semiconductor will be described.
- First, as illustrated in
FIG. 17A , an insulatingfilm 701 is formed over an insulating surface of a substrate 700, and agate electrode 702 is formed over the insulatingfilm 701. - Although there is no particular limitation on a substrate which can be used as the substrate 700 as long as it has a light-transmitting property, it is necessary that the substrate have at least enough heat resistance to heat treatment performed later. For example, a glass substrate manufactured by a fusion method or a float method, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, or the like can be used as the substrate 700. In the case where a glass substrate is used and the temperature at which the heat treatment is to be performed later is high, a glass substrate whose strain point is higher than or equal to 730° C. is preferably used. Although a substrate formed of a flexible synthetic resin such as plastic generally has a lower resistance temperature than the aforementioned substrates, it may be used as long as being resistant to a processing temperature during manufacturing steps.
- The insulating
film 701 is formed using a material which can withstand a temperature of heat treatment in a later manufacturing step. The insulatingfilm 701 serves as a base layer. Specifically, it is preferable that the insulatingfilm 701 have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using one or more of insulating layers selected from a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer, a silicon nitride oxide layer, a silicon oxynitride layer, an aluminum nitride layer, an aluminum oxide layer, an aluminum oxynitride layer, an aluminum nitride oxide layer, a gallium oxide layer, and the like. With the use of any of the above materials, diffusion of an impurity element from the substrate 700 can be prevented. - When a halogen element such as chlorine or fluorine is contained in the base layer, a function of preventing diffusion of an impurity element from the substrate 700 can be further improved. The concentration of a halogen element to be contained in the base layer is measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS) and its peak is preferably greater than or equal to 1×1015/cm3 and less than or equal to 1×1020/cm3.
- Gallium oxide may be used for the base layer. Alternatively, a stacked-layer structure of a gallium oxide layer and the above insulating layer may be used for the base layer. Gallium oxide is a material which is hardly charged; therefore, variation in threshold voltage due to charge buildup of the insulating layer can be suppressed.
- In this specification, an oxynitride denotes a material in which the amount of oxygen is larger than that of nitrogen, and a nitride oxide denotes a material in which the amount of nitrogen is larger than that of oxygen.
- The
gate electrode 702 can be formed with a single layer or a stacked layer using one or more of conductive films including a metal material such as molybdenum (Mo), titanium (Ti), chromium (Cr), tantalum (Ta), tungsten (W), neodymium (Nd), scandium (Sc), or magnesium (Mg), or an alloy material which includes any of these metal materials as a main component, or a nitride of these metals. Note that aluminum (Al) or copper (Cu) can also be used as such a metal material if it can withstand the temperature of heat treatment to be performed in a later process. Aluminum or copper is preferably combined with a refractory metal material so as to prevent a heat resistance problem and a corrosive problem. As the refractory metal material, molybdenum, titanium, chromium, tantalum, tungsten, neodymium, scandium, or the like can be used. - The thickness of the
gate electrode 702 is in the range of 10 nm to 400 nm, preferably 100 nm to 200 nm. In this embodiment, after a conductive film for the gate electrode is formed to have a thickness of 150 nm by a sputtering method using a tungsten target, the conductive film is processed (patterned) into a desired shape by etching, whereby thegate electrode 702 is formed. Note that when end portions of the formed gate electrode are tapered, coverage with a gate insulating film stacked thereover is improved, which is preferable. Note that a resist mask may be formed by an inkjet method. Formation of the resist mask by an inkjet method needs no photomask; thus, manufacturing cost can be reduced. - Next, as illustrated in
FIG. 17B , agate insulating film 703 is formed over thegate electrode 702, and an island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 is formed over thegate insulating film 703 in a position overlapping with thegate electrode 702. - The
gate insulating film 703 can be formed with a single layer or a stacked layer using silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum oxide, aluminum nitride, aluminum oxynitride, aluminum nitride oxide, tantalum oxide, gallium oxide, lanthanum oxide, cesium oxide, magnesium oxide, yttrium oxide, hafnium oxide, hafnium silicate (HfSixOy (x>0, y>0)), hafnium silicate to which nitrogen is added (HfSixOyNz (x>0, y>0, z>0)), hafnium aluminate to which nitrogen is added (HfAlxOyNz (x>0, y>0, z>0)), or the like. A plasma CVD method, a sputtering method, or the like can be employed. It is preferable that thegate insulating film 703 contain an impurity such as moisture or hydrogen as little as possible. In the case where a silicon oxide film is formed by a sputtering method, a silicon target or a quartz target is used as a target and oxygen or a mixed gas of oxygen and argon is used as a sputtering gas. - An oxide semiconductor which is made to be an i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor by reduction of oxygen deficiency is extremely sensitive to an interface state. Therefore, the interface between the oxide semiconductor and the
gate insulating film 703 is important. Thus, higher quality is demanded for the gate insulating film (GI) in contact with the oxide semiconductor. - For example, a high-density plasma enhanced CVD using a microwave (frequency: 2.45 GHz) is preferably used, in which case an insulating film which is dense, has high withstand voltage, and is of high quality can be formed. When the oxide semiconductor and the high-quality gate insulating film are in close contact with each other, the interface state density can be reduced and favorable interface characteristics can be obtained.
- Needless to say, other film formation methods, such as a sputtering method or a plasma CVD method, can be applied as long as a high-quality insulating film can be formed as the
gate insulating film 703. In any case, any insulating film that has a reduced interface state density between a gate insulating film and the oxide semiconductor and can form a favorable interface as well as having a favorable film quality as the gate insulating film can be used. - In this embodiment, the
gate insulating film 703 having a structure in which an aluminum oxide film having a thickness of 100 nm formed by a sputtering method is stacked over a silicon nitride film having a thickness of 50 nm formed by a sputtering method is formed. The thickness of thegate insulating film 703 may be set as appropriate depending on characteristics needed for the transistor and may be about 350 nm to 400 nm. - Note that the
gate insulating film 703 is in contact with the oxide semiconductor to be formed later. When hydrogen is contained in the oxide semiconductor, characteristics of the transistor are adversely affected; therefore, it is preferable that thegate insulating film 703 do not contain hydrogen, a hydroxyl group, and moisture. In order that thegate insulating film 703 contains as little hydrogen, a hydroxyl group, and moisture as possible, it is preferable that an impurity adsorbed on the substrate 700, such as moisture or hydrogen, be eliminated and removed by preheating the substrate 700, over which thegate electrode 702 is formed, in a preheating chamber of a sputtering apparatus, as a pretreatment for film formation. The temperature for the preheating is higher than or equal to 100° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C., preferably higher than or equal to 150° C. and lower than or equal to 300° C. As an exhaustion unit provided in the preheating chamber, a cryopump is preferable. Note that this preheating treatment can be omitted. - The island-shaped oxide semiconductor film can be formed by processing an oxide semiconductor film formed over the
gate insulating film 703 into a desired shape. The thickness of the oxide semiconductor film is greater than or equal to 2 nm and less than or equal to 200 nm, preferably greater than or equal to 3 nm and less than or equal to 50 nm, further preferably greater than or equal to 3 nm and less than or equal to 20 nm. The oxide semiconductor film is formed by a sputtering method using an oxide semiconductor target. Moreover, the oxide semiconductor film can be formed by a sputtering method under a rare gas (e.g., argon) atmosphere, an oxygen atmosphere, or a mixed atmosphere of a rare gas (e.g., argon) and oxygen. - In this embodiment, as the oxide semiconductor film, an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor thin film with a thickness of 30 nm, which is obtained by a sputtering method using a metal oxide target including indium (In), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn), is used. As the target, for example, a target of In2O3:Ga2O3:ZnO=1:1:2 (molar ratio), In2O3:Ga2O3:ZnO=1:1:1 (molar ratio), or In2O3:Ga2O3:ZnO=1:1:4 (molar ratio) can be used. Note that an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor can be referred to as IGZO.
- An In—Sn—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor can be referred to as ITZO. In the case where an ITZO thin film is used as the oxide semiconductor film, a target for formation of a film of ITZO by a sputtering method may have a composition ratio of In:Sn:Zn=1:2:2, In:Sn:Zn=2:1:3, In:Sn:Zn=1:1:1, or In:Sn:Zn=20:45:35 in an atomic ratio, for example.
- The relative density of the metal oxide target is greater than or equal to 90% and less than or equal to 100%, preferably greater than or equal to 95% and less than 100%.
- In this embodiment, the oxide semiconductor film is formed over the substrate 700 in such a manner that the substrate is placed in a treatment chamber kept at reduced pressure, a sputtering gas from which hydrogen and moisture have been removed is introduced into the treatment chamber while remaining moisture therein is removed, and the above target is used. For example, when argon is used as a sputtering gas, it is preferable that the purity be 9N, the dew point be −121° C., the content of H2O be 0.1 ppb or less, and the content of H2 be 0.5 ppb or less. When oxygen is used as a sputtering gas, it is preferable that the purity be 8N, the dew point be −112° C., the content of H2O be 1 ppb or less, and the content of H2 be 1 ppb or less.
- The substrate temperature in film formation may be higher than or equal to 100° C. and lower than or equal to 600° C., preferably higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C. By forming the oxide semiconductor film in a state where the substrate is heated, the concentration of an impurity contained in the formed oxide semiconductor film can be reduced. In addition, damage by sputtering can be reduced. In order to remove remaining moisture in the treatment chamber, an entrapment vacuum pump is preferably used. For example, a cryopump, an ion pump, or a titanium sublimation pump is preferably used. The evacuation unit may be a turbo pump provided with a cold trap. In the deposition chamber which is evacuated with the cryopump, for example, a hydrogen atom, a compound containing a hydrogen atom, such as water (H2O), (more preferably, also a compound containing a carbon atom), and the like are removed, whereby the concentration of an impurity contained in the oxide semiconductor film formed in the deposition chamber can be reduced.
- An example of the deposition conditions is as follows: the distance between the substrate and the target is 100 mm, the pressure is 0.6 Pa, the electric power of the direct-current (DC) power source is 0.5 kW, and oxygen (the flow rate of oxygen is 100%) is used as a sputtering gas. Note that a pulsed direct-current (DC) power source is preferable because dust generated in deposition can be reduced and the film thickness can be made uniform.
- In order that the oxide semiconductor film contains as little hydrogen, a hydroxyl group, and moisture as possible, it is preferable that an impurity adsorbed on the substrate 700, such as moisture or hydrogen, be eliminated and removed by preheating the substrate 700, over which films up to and including the
gate insulating film 703 are formed, in a preheating chamber of a sputtering apparatus, as a pretreatment for film formation. The temperature for the preheating is higher than or equal to 100° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C., preferably higher than or equal to 150° C. and lower than or equal to 300° C. As an exhaustion unit, a cryopump is preferably provided for the preheating chamber. Note that this preheating treatment can be omitted. This preheating may be similarly performed on the substrate 700 over which films up to and including aconductive film 705 and aconductive film 706 are formed, before the formation of an insulatingfilm 707 which will be formed later. - The concentration of an alkali metal such as Na or Li in the oxide semiconductor film is preferably less than or equal to 1×1018 atoms/cm3, further preferably less than or equal to 2×1016 atoms/cm3.
- Note that etching for forming the island-shaped
oxide semiconductor film 704 may be wet etching, dry etching, or both dry etching and wet etching. As the etching gas for dry etching, a gas containing chlorine (chlorine-based gas such as chlorine (Cl2), boron trichloride (BCl3), silicon tetrachloride (SiCl4), or carbon tetrachloride (CCl4)) is preferably used. Alternatively, a gas containing fluorine (fluorine-based gas such as carbon tetrafluoride (CF4), sulfur hexafluoride (SF6), nitrogen trifluoride (NF3), or trifluoromethane (CHF3)); hydrogen bromide (HBr); oxygen (O2); any of these gases to which a rare gas such as helium (He) or argon (Ar) is added; or the like can be used. - As the dry etching method, a parallel plate RIE (reactive ion etching) method or an ICP (inductively coupled plasma) etching method can be used. In order to etch the films into desired shapes, the etching condition (the amount of electric power applied to a coil-shaped electrode, the amount of electric power applied to an electrode on a substrate side, the temperature of the electrode on the substrate side, or the like) is adjusted as appropriate.
- As an etchant used for wet etching, ITO-07N (produced by KANTO CHEMICAL CO., INC.) may be used.
- A resist mask for forming the island-shaped
oxide semiconductor film 704 may be formed by an inkjet method. Formation of the resist mask by an inkjet method needs no photomask; thus, manufacturing cost can be reduced. - Note that the oxide semiconductor film formed by sputtering or the like contains a large amount of moisture or hydrogen (including a hydroxyl group) as an impurity in some cases. Moisture or hydrogen easily forms a donor level and thus serves as an impurity in the oxide semiconductor. In one embodiment of the present invention, in order to reduce an impurity such as moisture or hydrogen in the oxide semiconductor film (dehydration or dehydrogenation), the island-shaped
oxide semiconductor film 704 is subjected to heat treatment in a reduced-pressure atmosphere, an inert gas atmosphere of nitrogen, a rare gas, or the like, an oxygen gas atmosphere, or an ultra dry air atmosphere (the moisture amount is 20 ppm (−55° C. by conversion into a dew point) or less, preferably 1 ppm or less, further preferably 10 ppb or less, in the case where the measurement is performed by a dew point meter in a cavity ring down laser spectroscopy (CRDS) method). - By performing heat treatment on the island-shaped
oxide semiconductor film 704, moisture or hydrogen in the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 can be eliminated. Specifically, heat treatment may be performed at a temperature higher than or equal to 250° C. and lower than or equal to 750° C., preferably higher than or equal to 400° C. and lower than the strain point of a substrate. For example, heat treatment may be performed at 500° C. for approximately more than or equal to 3 minutes and less than or equal to 6 minutes. When an RTA method is used for the heat treatment, dehydration or dehydrogenation can be performed in a short time; therefore, treatment can be performed even at a temperature higher than the strain point of a glass substrate. - In this embodiment, an electrical furnace that is one of heat treatment apparatuses is used.
- Note that a heat treatment apparatus is not limited to an electrical furnace, and may include a device for heating an object to be processed by heat conduction or heat radiation from a heating element such as a resistance heating element. For example, an RTA (rapid thermal anneal) apparatus such as a GRTA (gas rapid thermal anneal) apparatus or an LRTA (lamp rapid thermal anneal) apparatus can be used. An LRTA apparatus is an apparatus for heating an object to be processed by radiation of light (an electromagnetic wave) emitted from a lamp such as a halogen lamp, a metal halide lamp, a xenon arc lamp, a carbon arc lamp, a high pressure sodium lamp, or a high pressure mercury lamp. A GRTA apparatus is an apparatus for heat treatment using a high-temperature gas. As the gas, an inert gas which does not react with an object to be processed by heat treatment, such as nitrogen or a rare gas such as argon is used.
- Note that it is preferable that in the heat treatment, moisture, hydrogen, or the like be not contained in nitrogen or a rare gas such as helium, neon, or argon. Alternatively, the purity of nitrogen or the rare gas such as helium, neon, or argon which is introduced into a heat treatment apparatus is set to be 6N (99.9999%) or higher, preferably 7N (99.99999%) or higher (that is, the impurity concentration is 1 ppm or lower, preferably 0.1 ppm or lower).
- Through the above-described process, the concentration of hydrogen in the island-shaped
oxide semiconductor film 704 can be reduced and the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 can be purified. In addition, the transistor can be manufactured using a large-sized substrate, so that the productivity can be increased. The above heat treatment can be performed at any time after the oxide semiconductor film is formed. - Note that in the case where the oxide semiconductor film is heated, although depending on a material of the oxide semiconductor film or heating conditions, plate-shaped crystals are formed at the surface of the oxide semiconductor film in some cases. The plate-shaped crystal is preferably a single crystal which is c-axis-aligned in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the oxide semiconductor film. Note that when a surface of the
gate insulating film 703 in contact with the oxide semiconductor film is uneven, a plate-shaped crystal is a polycrystal. Therefore, the surface of the base is preferably as even as possible. Specifically, the surface of the base may have an average surface roughness (Ra) of 1 nm or less, preferably 0.3 nm or less, further preferably 0.1 nm or less. Ra can be measured using an atomic force microscope (AFM). - Next, as illustrated in
FIG. 17C , theconductive film 705 and theconductive film 706 functioning as a source electrode and a drain electrode are formed, and an insulatingfilm 707 is formed over theconductive film 705, theconductive film 706, and the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704. - The
conductive film 705 and theconductive film 706 are formed in the following manner: a conductive film is formed to cover the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 by a sputtering method or a vacuum evaporation method, and then the conductive film is patterned by etching or the like. - The
conductive film 705 and theconductive film 706 are in contact with the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704. As a material of the conductive film for forming theconductive film 705 and theconductive film 706, any of the following materials can be used: an element selected from aluminum, chromium, copper, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, or tungsten; an alloy including any of these elements; an alloy film including the above elements in combination; or the like. Alternatively, a structure may be employed in which a film of a refractory metal such as chromium, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, or tungsten is stacked over or below a metal film of aluminum or copper. Aluminum or copper is preferably combined with a refractory metal material so as to prevent a heat resistance problem and a corrosion problem. As the refractory metal material, molybdenum, titanium, chromium, tantalum, tungsten, neodymium, scandium, yttrium, or the like can be used. - Further, the conductive film may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure of two or more layers. For example, a single-layer structure of an aluminum film containing silicon; a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is stacked over an aluminum film; a three-layer structure in which a titanium film, an aluminum film, and a titanium film are stacked in this order; and the like can be given.
- For the conductive film for forming the
conductive film 705 and theconductive film 706, a conductive metal oxide may be used. As the conductive metal oxide, indium oxide, tin oxide, zinc oxide, an alloy of indium oxide and tin oxide, an alloy of indium oxide and zinc oxide, or the metal oxide material containing silicon or silicon oxide can be used. - In the case where heat treatment is performed after formation of the conductive film, the conductive film preferably has heat resistance enough to withstand the heat treatment.
- Note that the material and etching conditions are adjusted as appropriate so that the island-shaped
oxide semiconductor film 704 is not removed in etching of the conductive film as much as possible. Depending on the etching conditions, there are some cases in which an exposed portion of the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 is partly etched and thereby a groove (a depression portion) is formed. - In this embodiment, a titanium film is used for the conductive film. Therefore, wet etching can be selectively performed on the conductive film using a solution (ammonia hydrogen peroxide mixture) containing ammonia and hydrogen peroxide water; however, the island-shaped
oxide semiconductor film 704 is partly etched in some cases. As the ammonia hydrogen peroxide mixture, specifically, an aqueous solution in which oxygenated water of 31 wt %, ammonia water of 28 wt %, and water are mixed at a volume ratio of 2:1:1 is used. Alternatively, dry etching may be performed on the conductive film with the use of a gas containing chlorine (Cl2), boron trichloride (BCl3), or the like. - In order to reduce the number of photomasks and steps in a photolithography step, etching may be performed with the use of a resist mask formed using a multi-tone mask through which light is transmitted so as to have a plurality of intensities. A resist mask formed with the use of a multi-tone mask has a plurality of thicknesses and further can be changed in shape by etching; therefore, the resist mask can be used in a plurality of etching steps for processing into different patterns. Therefore, a resist mask corresponding to at least two kinds or more of different patterns can be formed by one multi-tone mask. Thus, the number of light-exposure masks can be reduced and the number of corresponding photolithography steps can be also reduced, whereby simplification of a process can be realized.
- Note that before formation of the insulating
film 707, the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 is subjected to plasma treatment with the use of a gas such as N2O, N2, or Ar. By the plasma treatment, adsorbed water or the like attached to an exposed surface of the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 is removed. Plasma treatment may be performed using a mixture gas of oxygen and argon as well. - The insulating
film 707 preferably contains an impurity such as moisture or hydrogen as little as possible. An insulating film of a single layer or a plurality of insulating films stacked may be employed for the insulatingfilm 707. When hydrogen is contained in the insulatingfilm 707, entry of the hydrogen to the oxide semiconductor film or extraction of oxygen from the oxide semiconductor film by the hydrogen occurs, whereby a back channel portion of the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 has lower resistance (n-type conductivity); thus, a parasitic channel might be formed. Therefore, it is important that a film formation method in which hydrogen is not used be employed in order to form the insulatingfilm 707 containing as little hydrogen as possible. - A material having a high barrier property is preferably used for the insulating
film 707. For example, a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum nitride film, an aluminum nitride oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a gallium oxide film, or the like can be used as the insulating film having a high barrier property. When the insulating film having a high barrier property is used, an impurity such as moisture or hydrogen can be prevented from entering the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704, thegate insulating film 703, or the interface between the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 and another insulating film and the vicinity thereof. - In this embodiment, the insulating
film 707 having a structure in which an aluminum oxide film with a thickness of 100 nm formed by a sputtering method is stacked over a gallium oxide film with a thickness of 200 nm formed by a sputtering method is formed. The substrate temperature in film formation may be higher than or equal to room temperature and lower than or equal to 300° C. and in this embodiment, is 100° C. - The insulating film in contact with the oxide semiconductor preferably contains much oxygen that exceeds the stoichiometric proportion, preferably at a proportion greater than 1 time and less than twice of the stoichiometric proportion. By provision of such an insulating film including an oxygen excess region in contact with the island-shaped
oxide semiconductor film 704, oxygen can supplied to the interface between the insulating film and the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 and the inside of the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704; thus, oxygen deficiency can be reduced. - After the insulating
film 707 is formed, heat treatment may be performed. The heat treatment is performed in a nitrogen atmosphere, an atmosphere of ultra-dry air, or a rare gas (e.g., argon, helium) atmosphere preferably at a temperature higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C., for example, higher than or equal to 250° C. and lower than or equal to 350° C. It is desirable that the content of water in the gas be 20 ppm or less, preferably 1 ppm or less, further preferably 10 ppb or less. In this embodiment, for example, heat treatment is performed at 250° C. for one hour under a nitrogen atmosphere. Alternatively, RTA treatment for a short time at a high temperature may be performed before the formation of theconductive film 705 and theconductive film 706 in a manner similar to that of the previous heat treatment performed on the oxide semiconductor film for reduction of moisture or hydrogen. - Even when oxygen deficiency is generated in the island-shaped
oxide semiconductor film 704 by the previous heat treatment, oxygen is supplied to the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 from the insulating film including an oxygen excess region by performing heat treatment after the insulating film including an oxygen excess region is provided in contact with the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704. By supplying oxygen to the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704, oxygen deficiency that serves as a donor is reduced in the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 and the stoichiometric proportion can be satisfied. The island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 preferably contains oxygen whose amount is greater than that in the stoichiometric proportion. As a result, the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 can be made to be i-type or substantially i-type and variation in electric characteristics of the transistor due to oxygen deficiency can be reduced; thus, electric characteristics can be improved. The timing of this heat treatment is not particularly limited as long as it is after the formation of the insulatingfilm 707. When this heat treatment doubles as another step such as heat treatment for formation of a resin film or heat treatment for reduction of the resistance of a light-transmitting conductive film, the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 can be made to be i-type or substantially i-type without the number of steps increased. - Moreover, the oxygen deficiency that serves as a donor in the island-shaped
oxide semiconductor film 704 may be reduced by subjecting the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 to heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere so that oxygen is added to the oxide semiconductor. The heat treatment is performed at a temperature of, for example, higher than or equal to 100° C. and lower than 350° C., preferably higher than or equal to 150° C. and lower than 250° C. It is preferable that an oxygen gas used for the heat treatment under an oxygen atmosphere do not include water, hydrogen, or the like. Alternatively, the purity of the oxygen gas which is introduced into the heat treatment apparatus is preferably 6N (99.9999%) or higher, further preferably 7N (99.99999%) or higher (that is, the impurity concentration in the oxygen is 1 ppm or lower, preferably 0.1 ppm or lower). - Alternatively, oxygen may be added to the island-shaped
oxide semiconductor film 704 by an ion implantation method, an ion doping method, or the like to reduce oxygen deficiency serving as a donor. For example, oxygen which is made into a plasma state by a microwave at 2.45 GHz may be added to the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704. - Note that a back gate electrode may be formed in a position overlapping with the island-shaped
oxide semiconductor film 704 by forming a conductive film over the insulatingfilm 707 and then patterning the conductive film. In the case where the back gate electrode is formed, an insulating film is preferably formed to cover the back gate electrode. The back gate electrode can be formed using a material and a structure similar to those of thegate electrode 702 or theconductive films - The thickness of the back gate electrode is set to be 10 nm to 400 nm, preferably 100 nm to 200 nm. For example, the back gate electrode may be formed in a such a manner that a conductive film in which a titanium film, an aluminum film, and a titanium film are stacked is formed, a resist mask is formed by a photolithography method or the like, and unnecessary portions are removed by etching so that the conductive film is processed (patterned) to a desired shape. The back gate electrode also functions as a light-blocking film, whereby photodegradation of the transistor such as negative-bias temperature stress photodegradation can be reduced and the reliability can be increased.
- Through the above-described process, a
transistor 708 is formed. - The
transistor 708 includes thegate electrode 702, thegate insulating film 703 over thegate electrode 702, the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 which is over thegate insulating film 703 and overlaps with thegate electrode 702, and a pair of theconductive film 705 and theconductive film 706 formed over the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704. Further, thetransistor 708 may include the insulatingfilm 707 as its constituent. Thetransistor 708 illustrated inFIG. 17C has a channel-etched structure in which part of the island-shapedoxide semiconductor film 704 between theconductive film 705 and theconductive film 706 is etched. - Although the
transistor 708 is described as a single-gate transistor, a multi-gate transistor including a plurality of channel formation regions can be manufactured as needed. The multi-gate transistor includes a plurality of thegate electrodes 702 electrically connected to each other. - This embodiment can be implemented in combination with other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, structural examples of a transistor will be described. Note that the same portions as those in the above embodiments, portions having functions similar to those in the above embodiments, the same steps as those in the above embodiments, and steps similar to those in the above embodiments may be described as in the above embodiments, and repeated description thereof is omitted in this embodiment. Further, a specific description for the same portions is omitted.
- A
transistor 2450 illustrated inFIG. 18A includes agate electrode 2401 over asubstrate 2400, agate insulating film 2402 over thegate electrode 2401, anoxide semiconductor layer 2403 over thegate insulating film 2402, and asource electrode 2405 a and adrain electrode 2405 b over theoxide semiconductor layer 2403. An insulatingfilm 2407 is formed over theoxide semiconductor layer 2403, thesource electrode 2405 a, and thedrain electrode 2405 b. A protectiveinsulating film 2409 may be formed over the insulatingfilm 2407. Thetransistor 2450 is a bottom-gate transistor, and is also an inverted staggered transistor. - A
transistor 2460 illustrated inFIG. 18B includes thegate electrode 2401 over thesubstrate 2400, thegate insulating film 2402 over thegate electrode 2401, theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 over thegate insulating film 2402, a channelprotective layer 2406 over theoxide semiconductor layer 2403, and thesource electrode 2405 a and thedrain electrode 2405 b over the channelprotective layer 2406 and theoxide semiconductor layer 2403. The protectiveinsulating film 2409 may be formed over thesource electrode 2405 a and thedrain electrode 2405 b. Thetransistor 2460 is a bottom-gate transistor called a channel-protective type (also referred to as a channel-stop type) transistor and is also an inverted staggered transistor. The channelprotective layer 2406 can be formed using a material and a method similar to those of any other insulating film. - A
transistor 2470 illustrated inFIG. 18C includes abase film 2436 over thesubstrate 2400, theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 over thebase film 2436, asource electrode 2405 a and adrain electrode 2405 b over theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 and thebase film 2436, thegate insulating film 2402 over theoxide semiconductor layer 2403, thesource electrode 2405 a, and thedrain electrode 2405 b, and thegate electrode 2401 over thegate insulating film 2402. The protectiveinsulating film 2409 may be formed over thegate electrode 2401. Thetransistor 2470 is a top-gate transistor. - A
transistor 2480 illustrated inFIG. 18D includes afirst gate electrode 2411 over thesubstrate 2400, a firstgate insulating film 2413 over thefirst gate electrode 2411, theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 over the firstgate insulating film 2413, and thesource electrode 2405 a and thedrain electrode 2405 b over theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the firstgate insulating film 2413. A secondgate insulating film 2414 is formed over theoxide semiconductor layer 2403, thesource electrode 2405 a, and thedrain electrode 2405 b, and asecond gate electrode 2412 is formed over the secondgate insulating film 2414. The protectiveinsulating film 2409 may be formed over thesecond gate electrode 2412. - The
transistor 2480 has a structure combining thetransistor 2450 and thetransistor 2470. Thefirst gate electrode 2411 and thesecond gate electrode 2412 can be electrically connected to each other, so that they function as one gate electrode. Either thefirst gate electrode 2411 or thesecond gate electrode 2412 may be simply referred to as a gate electrode and the other may be referred to as a back gate electrode. - A
transistor 2550 illustrated inFIG. 19A includes thegate electrode 2401 over thesubstrate 2400, thegate insulating film 2402 over thegate electrode 2401, thesource electrode 2405 a and thedrain electrode 2405 b over thegate insulating film 2402, and theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 over thegate insulating film 2402, thesource electrode 2405 a, and thedrain electrode 2405 b. The insulatingfilm 2407 is formed over theoxide semiconductor layer 2403, thesource electrode 2405 a, and thedrain electrode 2405 b. The protectiveinsulating film 2409 may be formed over the insulatingfilm 2407. Thetransistor 2550 is a bottom-gate transistor and is also an inverted staggered transistor. - A
transistor 2560 illustrated inFIG. 19B includes thebase film 2436 over thesubstrate 2400, thesource electrode 2405 a and thedrain electrode 2405 b over thebase film 2436, theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 over thebase film 2436, thesource electrode 2405 a, and thedrain electrode 2405 b, thegate insulating film 2402 over theoxide semiconductor layer 2403, thesource electrode 2405 a, and thedrain electrode 2405 b, and thegate electrode 2401 over thegate insulating film 2402. The protectiveinsulating film 2409 may be formed over thegate electrode 2401. Thetransistor 2560 is a top-gate transistor. - A
transistor 2570 illustrated inFIG. 19C includes thefirst gate electrode 2411 over thesubstrate 2400, the firstgate insulating film 2413 over thefirst gate electrode 2411, thesource electrode 2405 a and thedrain electrode 2405 b over the firstgate insulating film 2413, theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 over the firstgate insulating film 2413, thesource electrode 2405 a, and thedrain electrode 2405 b, the secondgate insulating film 2414 over theoxide semiconductor layer 2403, thesource electrode 2405 a, and thedrain electrode 2405 b, and thesecond gate electrode 2412 over the secondgate insulating film 2414. The protectiveinsulating film 2409 may be formed over thesecond gate electrode 2412. - The
transistor 2570 has a structure combining thetransistor 2550 and thetransistor 2560. Thefirst gate electrode 2411 and thesecond gate electrode 2412 can be electrically connected to each other, so that they function as one gate electrode. Either thefirst gate electrode 2411 or thesecond gate electrode 2412 may be simply referred to as a gate electrode and the other may be referred to as a back gate electrode. - By changing a potential of the back gate electrode, the threshold voltage of the transistor can be changed. The back gate electrode is formed so as to overlap with a channel formation region in the
oxide semiconductor layer 2403. Further, the back gate electrode may be electrically insulated and in a floating state, or may be in a state where the back gate electrode is supplied with a potential. In the latter case, the back gate electrode may be supplied with a potential at the same level as that of the gate electrode, or may be supplied with a fixed potential such as a ground potential. The level of the potential applied to the back gate electrode is controlled, so that the threshold voltage of thetransistor 2480 or thetransistor 2570 can be controlled. - When the
oxide semiconductor layer 2403 is covered with the back gate electrode, light from the back gate electrode side can be prevented from entering theoxide semiconductor layer 2403. Therefore, photodegradation of theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 can be prevented and deterioration in characteristics such as a shift of the threshold voltage of the transistor can be prevented. - An insulating film in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer 2403 (in this embodiment, corresponding to the
gate insulating film 2402, the insulatingfilm 2407, the channelprotective layer 2406, thebase film 2436, the firstgate insulating film 2413, and the second gate insulating film 2414) is preferably formed of an insulating material containing aGroup 13 element and oxygen. Many oxide semiconductor materials contain aGroup 13 element, and an insulating material containing aGroup 13 element works well with an oxide semiconductor. By using an insulating material containing aGroup 13 element for the insulating film in contact with the oxide semiconductor, an interface with the oxide semiconductor can keep a favorable state. - An insulating material containing a
Group 13 element refers to an insulating material containing one ormore Group 13 elements. As the insulating material containing aGroup 13 element, a gallium oxide, an aluminum oxide, an aluminum gallium oxide, a gallium aluminum oxide, and the like are given. Here, aluminum gallium oxide refers to a material in which the amount of aluminum is larger than that of gallium in atomic percent, and gallium aluminum oxide refers to a material in which the amount of gallium is larger than or equal to that of aluminum in atomic percent. - For example, in the case of forming an insulating film in contact with an oxide semiconductor film containing gallium, a material containing gallium oxide may be used for the insulating film, so that favorable characteristics can be kept at the interface between the oxide semiconductor film and the insulating film. When the oxide semiconductor film and the insulating film containing gallium oxide are provided in contact with each other, pileup of hydrogen at the interface between the oxide semiconductor film and the insulating film can be reduced, for example. Note that a similar effect can be obtained in the case where an element in the same group as a constituent element of the oxide semiconductor film is used in an insulating film. For example, it is effective to form an insulating film with the use of a material containing aluminum oxide. Note that aluminum oxide has a property of not easily transmitting water. Thus, it is preferable to use a material containing aluminum oxide in terms of preventing entry of water to the oxide semiconductor film.
- The insulating material of the insulating film in contact with the
oxide semiconductor layer 2403 is preferably made to include a region containing oxygen in a proportion higher than that in the stoichiometric composition (an oxygen excess region) by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping. “Oxygen doping” refers to addition of oxygen into a bulk. Note that the term “bulk” is used in order to clarify that oxygen is added not only to a surface of a thin film but also to the inside of the thin film. In addition, “oxygen doping” includes “oxygen plasma doping” in which oxygen which is made to be plasma is added to a bulk. The oxygen doping may be performed using an ion implantation method or an ion doping method. - For example, in the case where the insulating film in contact with the
oxide semiconductor layer 2403 is formed of gallium oxide, the composition of gallium oxide can be set to be Ga2Ox (x=3+α, 0<α<1) by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping. - In the case where the insulating film in contact with the
oxide semiconductor layer 2403 is formed of aluminum oxide, the composition of aluminum oxide can be set to be Al2Ox (x=3+α, 0<α<1) by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping. - In the case where the insulating film in contact with the
oxide semiconductor layer 2403 is formed of gallium aluminum oxide (aluminum gallium oxide), the composition of gallium aluminum oxide (aluminum gallium oxide) can be set to be GaxAl2−xO3+α (0<x<2, 0<α<1) by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping. - When the insulating film including an oxygen excess region is in contact with the oxide semiconductor film, oxygen that exists excessively in the insulating film is supplied to the oxide semiconductor film, and oxygen deficiency in the oxide semiconductor film or at the interface between the oxide semiconductor film and the insulating film is reduced. Thus, the oxide semiconductor film can be an i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor.
- The insulating film including an oxygen excess region may be applied to either the insulating film located on the upper side of the oxide semiconductor layer or the insulating film located on the lower side of the oxide semiconductor layer of the insulating films in contact with the
oxide semiconductor layer 2403; however, it is preferable to apply such an insulating film to both of the insulating films in contact with theoxide semiconductor layer 2403. The above-described effect can be enhanced with a structure where theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 is sandwiched between the insulating films each including a region containing oxygen with a higher proportion than that in the stoichiometric composition, which are used as the insulating films in contact with theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 and placed on the upper side and the lower side of theoxide semiconductor layer 2403. - The insulating films on the upper side and the lower side of the
oxide semiconductor layer 2403 may contain the same constituent element or different constituent elements. For example, the insulating films on the upper side and the lower side may be both formed of gallium oxide whose composition is Ga2Ox (x=3+α, 0<α<1). Alternatively, one of the insulating films on the upper side and the lower side may be formed of gallium oxide whose composition is Ga2Ox (x=3+α, 0<α<1) and the other may be formed of aluminum oxide whose composition is Al2Ox (x=3+α, 0<α<1). - The insulating film in contact with the
oxide semiconductor layer 2403 may be formed by stacking insulating films which each include an oxygen excess region. For example, the insulating film on the upper side of theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 may be formed as follows: gallium oxide whose composition is Ga2O, (x=3+α, 0<α<1) is formed and gallium aluminum oxide (aluminum gallium oxide) whose composition is GaxAl2−xO3+a (0<x<2, 0<a<1) is formed thereover. - Oxide conductive layers functioning as a source region and a drain region may be provided between the
oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the source anddrain electrodes FIGS. 28A and 28B illustratetransistors transistor 2470 inFIG. 18C further includes oxide conductive layers. - The
transistors FIGS. 28A and 28B each include oxideconductive layers oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the source anddrain electrodes transistors FIGS. 28A and 28B are examples where the oxideconductive layers - In the
transistor 2471 inFIG. 28A , an oxide semiconductor film and an oxide conductive film are stacked and processed by the same photolithography step, so that theoxide semiconductor layer 2403 having an island shape and an oxide conductive film having an island shape are formed. After thesource electrode 2405 a and thedrain electrode 2405 b are formed over the oxide semiconductor layer and the oxide conductive film, the island-shaped oxide conductive film is etched with the use of thesource electrode 2405 a and thedrain electrode 2405 b as masks, so that the oxideconductive layers - In the
transistor 2472 inFIG. 28B , an oxide conductive film is formed over theoxide semiconductor layer 2403, a metal conductive film is formed thereover, and the oxide conductive film and the metal conductive film are processed by the same photolithography step, so that the oxideconductive layers drain electrodes - In the etching treatment for processing the shape of the oxide conductive film, etching conditions (such as the kind of the etchant, the concentration, and the etching time) are adjusted as appropriate so that the oxide semiconductor layer is not etched excessively.
- As a formation method of the oxide
conductive layers - When oxide conductive layers are provided between the
oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the source anddrain electrodes oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the source anddrain electrodes transistors - Further, a structure including the oxide
conductive layers oxide semiconductor layer 2403 and the source anddrain electrodes transistors - Any of the above-described insulating films having barrier properties may be used as the protective insulating film, so that elimination of oxygen from the oxide semiconductor layer can be prevented. As an example of the insulating film having a barrier property, an aluminum oxide film can be given. By providing insulating films having barrier properties on the upper side and the lower side of the oxide semiconductor layer, the effect of preventing elimination of oxygen from the oxide semiconductor layer can be enhanced. In other words, reliability of a semiconductor device can be improved.
- This embodiment can be implemented in combination with other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, one embodiment of an oxide semiconductor layer which can be used as the semiconductor layers of the transistors disclosed in this specification will be described with reference to
FIGS. 29A to 29C . - The oxide semiconductor layer of this embodiment has a structure including a first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and a second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer which is stacked over the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and has a larger thickness than the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer.
- An insulating
layer 437 is formed over asubstrate 2400. In this embodiment, an oxide insulating layer with a thickness greater than or equal to 50 nm and less than or equal to 600 nm is formed as the insulatinglayer 437 by a PCVD method or a sputtering method. For example, a single layer selected from a silicon oxide film, a gallium oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxynitride film, and a silicon nitride oxide film or a stack of any of these films can be used. - Next, a first oxide semiconductor film with a thickness greater than or equal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 10 nm is formed over the insulating
layer 437. The first oxide semiconductor film is formed by a sputtering method, and the substrate temperature in the film formation by a sputtering method is set to be higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C. - In this embodiment, the first oxide semiconductor film is formed to a thickness of 5 nm in an oxygen atmosphere, an argon atmosphere, or an atmosphere including argon and oxygen under conditions where a metal oxide target for an oxide semiconductor (a target for an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor including In2O3, Ga2O3, and ZnO at 1:1:2 [molar ratio]) is used, the distance between the substrate and the target is 170 mm, the substrate temperature is 250° C., the pressure is 0.4 Pa, and the electric power of the direct current (DC) power source is 0.5 kW.
- Next, first heat treatment is performed under a condition where the atmosphere of a chamber in which the substrate is set is an atmosphere of nitrogen or dry air. The temperature of the first heat treatment is higher than or equal to 400° C. and lower than or equal to 750° C. Through the first heat treatment, a first crystalline
oxide semiconductor layer 450 a is formed (seeFIG. 29A ). - Depending on the substrate temperature at the time of deposition or the temperature of the first heat treatment, the deposition temperature or the first heat treatment causes crystallization from a film surface and crystal grows from the film surface toward the inside of the film; thus, c-axis aligned crystal is obtained. By the first heat treatment, a large amount of zinc and oxygen gather to the film surface, and one or more layers of graphen-type two-dimensional crystal including zinc and oxygen and having a hexagonal upper plane are formed at the outermost surface; the layer(s) at the outermost surface grow in the thickness direction to form a stack of layers. By increasing the temperature of the heat treatment, crystal growth proceeds from the surface to the inside and further from the inside to the bottom.
- By the first heat treatment, oxygen in the insulating
layer 437 that is an oxide insulating layer is diffused to an interface between the insulatinglayer 437 and the first crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 450 a or the vicinity of the interface (within ±5 nm from the interface), whereby oxygen deficiency in the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is reduced. Therefore, it is preferable that oxygen be included in (in a bulk of) the insulatinglayer 437 used as a base insulating layer or at the interface between the first crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 450 a and the insulatinglayer 437 at an amount that exceeds at least the stoichiometric proportion. - Next, a second oxide semiconductor film with a thickness more than 10 nm is formed over the first crystalline
oxide semiconductor layer 450 a. The second oxide semiconductor film is formed by a sputtering method, and the substrate temperature in the film formation is set to be higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C. By setting the substrate temperature in the film formation to be higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C., precursors can be arranged in the oxide semiconductor film formed over and in contact with the surface of the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and so-called orderliness can be obtained. - In this embodiment, the second oxide semiconductor film is formed to a thickness of 25 nm using oxygen, argon, or a mixed gas of argon and oxygen as a sputtering gas under conditions where a metal oxide target for an oxide semiconductor (a target for an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor including In2O3, Ga2O3, and ZnO at 1:1:2 [molar ratio]) is used, the distance between the substrate and the target is 170 mm, the substrate temperature is 400° C., the pressure is 0.4 Pa, and the electric power of the direct current (DC) power source is 0.5 kW.
- Next, second heat treatment is performed under a condition where the atmosphere of a chamber in which the substrate is set is a nitrogen atmosphere, an oxygen atmosphere, or a mixed atmosphere of nitrogen and oxygen. The temperature of the second heat treatment is higher than or equal to 400° C. and lower than or equal to 750° C. Through the second heat treatment, a second crystalline
oxide semiconductor layer 450 b is formed (seeFIG. 29B ). The second heat treatment is performed in a nitrogen atmosphere, an oxygen atmosphere, or a mixed atmosphere of nitrogen and oxygen, whereby the density of the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is increased and the number of defects therein is reduced. By the second heat treatment, crystal growth proceeds in the thickness direction with the use of the first crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 450 a as a nucleus, that is, crystal growth proceeds from the bottom to the inside; thus, the second crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 450 b is formed. - It is preferable that steps from the formation of the insulating
layer 437 to the second heat treatment be successively performed without exposure to the air. The steps from the formation of the insulatinglayer 437 to the second heat treatment are preferably performed in an atmosphere which is controlled to include little hydrogen and moisture (such as an inert gas atmosphere, a reduced-pressure atmosphere, or a dry-air atmosphere); in terms of moisture, for example, a dry nitrogen atmosphere with a dew point of −40° C. or lower, preferably a dew point of −50° C. or lower may be employed. - Next, the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers, the first crystalline
oxide semiconductor layer 450 a and the second crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 450 b, is processed into anoxide semiconductor layer 453 including a stack of island-shaped oxide semiconductor layers (seeFIG. 29C ). In the drawing, the interface between the first crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 450 a and the second crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 450 b are indicated by a dotted line, and the first crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 450 a and the second crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 450 b are illustrated as a stack of oxide semiconductor layers; however, the interface is actually not distinct and is illustrated for easy understanding. - The stack of the oxide semiconductor layers can be processed by being etched after a mask having a desired shape is formed over the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers. The mask can be formed by a method such as photolithography. Alternatively, the mask may be formed by a method such as an ink-jet method.
- For the etching of the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers, either dry etching or wet etching may be employed. Needless to say, both of them may be employed in combination.
- A feature of the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer obtained by the above formation method is that they have c-axis alignment. Note that the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer comprise an oxide including a crystal with c-axis alignment (also referred to as C-axis Aligned Crystal (CAAC)), which has neither a single crystal structure nor an amorphous structure. The first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer partly include a crystal grain boundary.
- Note that examples of a material for the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer include a four-component metal oxide such as an In—Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based material; three-component metal oxides such as an In—Ga—Zn—O-based material (also referred to as IGZO), an In—Sn—Zn—O-based material (also referred to as ITZO), an In—Al—Zn—O-based material, a Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based material, an Al—Ga—Zn—O-based material, a Sn—Al—Zn—O-based material, an In—Hf—Zn—O-based material, an In—La—Zn—O-based material, an In—Ce—Zn—O-based material, an In—Pr—Zn—O-based material, an In—Nd—Zn—O-based material, an In—Sm—Zn—O-based material, an In—Eu—Zn—O-based material, an In—Gd—Zn—O-based material, an In—Tb—Zn—O-based material, an In—Dy—Zn—O-based material, an In—Ho—Zn—O-based material, an In—Er—Zn—O-based material, an In—Tm—Zn—O-based material, an In—Yb—Zn—O-based material, and an In—Lu—Zn—O-based material; two-component metal oxides such as an In—Zn—O-based material, a Sn—Zn—O-based material, an Al—Zn—O-based material, a Zn—Mg—O-based material, a Sn—Mg—O-based material, an In—Mg—O-based material, and an In—Ga—O-based material; and single-component metal oxides such as an In—O-based material, a Sn—O-based material, and a Zn—O-based material. In addition, the above materials may include SiO2. Here, for example, an In—Ga—Zn—O-based material means an oxide material including indium (In), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn), and there is no particular limitation on the composition ratio. Further, the In—Ga—Zn—O-based material may include an element other than In, Ga, and Zn.
- Without limitation to the two-layer structure in which the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is formed over the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer, a stacked structure including three or more layers may be formed by repeatedly performing a process of film formation and heat treatment for forming a third crystalline oxide semiconductor layer after the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is formed.
- The
oxide semiconductor layer 453 including the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers formed by the above formation method can be used as appropriate for a transistor which can be applied to a semiconductor device disclosed in this specification. - In the
transistor 2470 inEmbodiment 3, in which the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers of this embodiment is used as theoxide semiconductor layer 2403, an electric field is not applied from one surface to the other surface of the oxide semiconductor layer and current does not flow in the thickness direction (from one surface to the other surface; specifically, in the vertical direction inFIG. 18C ) of the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers. The transistor has a structure in which current mainly flows along the interface of the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers; therefore, even when the transistor is irradiated with light or even when a BT stress is applied to the transistor, deterioration of transistor characteristics is suppressed or reduced. - By forming a transistor with the use of a stack of a first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and a second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer, like the
oxide semiconductor layer 453, the transistor can have stable electric characteristics and high reliability. - This embodiment can be implemented in an appropriate combination with any of the structures described in the other embodiments.
- In this embodiment, an example of a substrate used in a liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to
FIGS. 20A, 20B, 20C, 20C ′, 20D, 20D′, 20E, and 20E′. - First, a layer to be separated 6116 which includes a transistor, an interlayer insulating film, a wiring, and a pixel electrode, and depending on a case, a counter electrode, a light-blocking film, an alignment film, or the like, is formed over a
substrate 6200 with aseparation layer 6201 interposed therebetween. - The
substrate 6200 may be a quartz substrate, a sapphire substrate, a ceramic substrate, a glass substrate, a metal substrate, or the like. Note that such a substrate which is thick enough to be definitely flexible enables precise formation of an element such as a transistor. The degree “not to be definitely flexible” means that the elastic modulus of the substrate is higher than or equivalent to that of a glass substrate used in generally fabricating a liquid crystal display. - The
separation layer 6201 is formed with a single layer or a stacked layer using any of elements selected from tungsten (W), molybdenum (Mo), titanium (Ti), tantalum (Ta), niobium (Nb), nickel (Ni), cobalt (Co), zirconium (Zr), zinc (Zn), ruthenium (Ru), rhodium (Rh), palladium (Pd), osmium (Os), iridium (Ir), and silicon (Si), an alloy material containing any of the above elements as its main component, and a compound material containing any of the above elements as its main component by a sputtering method, a plasma CVD method, a coating method, a printing method, or the like. - When the
separation layer 6201 has a single-layer structure, a tungsten layer, a molybdenum layer, or a layer containing a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum is preferably formed. Alternatively, a layer containing an oxide or an oxynitride of tungsten, a layer containing an oxide or an oxynitride of molybdenum, or a layer containing an oxide or an oxynitride of a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum is formed. Note that the mixture of tungsten and molybdenum corresponds to an alloy of tungsten and molybdenum, for example. - In the case where the
separation layer 6201 has a stacked-layer structure, it is preferable that a metal layer and a metal oxide layer be formed as a first layer and a second layer, respectively. Typically, it is preferable to form a tungsten layer, a molybdenum layer, or a layer containing a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum as the first layer and to form an oxide, an oxynitride, or a nitride oxide of tungsten, molybdenum, or a mixture of tungsten and molybdenum as the second layer. When the metal oxide layer is formed as the second layer, an oxide layer (such as a silicon oxide which can be utilized as an insulating layer) may be formed over the metal layer as the first layer so that an oxide of the metal is formed on a surface of the metal layer. - Then, the layer to be separated 6116 is formed over the separation layer 6201 (see
FIG. 20A ). The layer to be separated 6116 includes components necessary for an element substrate, such as a transistor, an interlayer insulating film, a wiring, and a pixel electrode, and further, depending on a case, a counter electrode, a light-blocking film, an alignment film, or the like. Such components can be normally formed over theseparation layer 6201. Materials, manufacturing methods, and structures of these components are similar to those described in any of the above embodiments, and repeated description thereof is omitted in this embodiment. Thus, the transistor and the electrode can be formed precisely using a known material and a known method. - Next, the layer to be separated 6116 is bonded to a
temporary supporting substrate 6202 with the use of an adhesive 6203 for separation and then, the layer to be separated 6116 is separated from theseparation layer 6201 over thesubstrate 6200 to be transferred (seeFIG. 20B ). Through this process, the layer to be separated 6116 is placed on the temporary supporting substrate side. Note that in this specification, a process in which a layer to be separated is transferred to a temporary supporting substrate from a formation substrate is referred to as a transfer process. - As the temporary supporting
substrate 6202, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a sapphire substrate, a ceramic substrate, a metal substrate, or the like can be used. Alternatively, a plastic substrate which can withstand the temperature of the following process may be used. - As the adhesive 6203 for separation which is used here, an adhesive which is soluble in water or a solvent, an adhesive which is capable of being plasticized upon irradiation of UV light, or the like is used so that the temporary supporting
substrate 6202 and the layer to be separated 6116 can be separated when necessary. - Any of various methods can be used as appropriate in a transfer process to the temporary supporting
substrate 6202. For example, when a film including a metal oxide film is formed as theseparation layer 6201 so as to be in contact with the layer to be separated, the metal oxide film is embrittled by crystallization, whereby the layer to be separated 6116 can be separated from thesubstrate 6200. When an amorphous silicon film containing hydrogen is formed as theseparation layer 6201 between thesubstrate 6200 and the layer to be separated 6116, the amorphous silicon film containing hydrogen is removed by laser light irradiation or etching, so that the layer to be separated 6116 can be separated from thesubstrate 6200. In the case where a film containing nitrogen, oxygen, hydrogen, or the like (for example, an amorphous silicon film containing hydrogen, an alloy film containing hydrogen, an alloy film containing oxygen, or the like) is used as theseparation layer 6201, theseparation layer 6201 can be irradiated with laser light to release the nitrogen, oxygen, or hydrogen contained in theseparation layer 6201 as a gas, so that separation between the layer to be separated 6116 and thesubstrate 6200 can be promoted. Alternatively, a liquid may be made to penetrate the interface between theseparation layer 6201 and the layer to be separated 6116 to cause separation of the layer to be separated 6116 from thesubstrate 6200. Still alternatively, when theseparation layer 6201 is formed using tungsten, the separation may be performed while theseparation layer 6201 is etched with the use of an ammonia hydrogen peroxide mixture. - Further, the transfer process can be facilitated by using plural kinds of separation methods described above in combination. That is, the separation can be performed with physical force (by a machine or the like) after performing laser light irradiation on part of the separation layer, etching on part of the separation layer with a gas, a solution, or the like, or mechanical removal of part of the separation layer with a sharp knife, a scalpel, or the like, in order that the separation layer and the layer to be separated can be easily separated from each other. In the case where the
separation layer 6201 is formed to have a stacked-layer structure of metal and a metal oxide, the layer to be separated can be physically separated easily from the separation layer by using a groove formed by laser light irradiation or a scratch made by a sharp knife, a scalpel, or the like as a trigger. - Alternatively, the separation may be performed while a liquid such as water is poured.
- As a method for separating the layer to be separated 6116 from the
substrate 6200, a method may alternatively be employed in which thesubstrate 6200 over which the layer to be separated 6116 is formed is removed by mechanical polishing or by etching using a solution or a halogen fluoride gas such as NF3, BrF3, or ClF3, or the like. In that case, theseparation layer 6201 is not necessarily provided. - Next, a surface of the layer to be separated 6116 or the
separation layer 6201 exposed due to separation of the layer to be separated 6116 from thesubstrate 6200 is bonded to atransfer substrate 6110 with the use of afirst adhesive layer 6111 including an adhesive different from the adhesive 6203 for separation (seeFIG. 20C ). - As a material of the
first adhesive layer 6111, various curable adhesives, e.g., a light curable adhesive such as a UV curable adhesive, a reactive curable adhesive, a thermal curable adhesive, and an anaerobic adhesive can be used. - As the
transfer substrate 6110, various substrates with high toughness, such as an organic resin film and a metal substrate, can be preferably used. Substrates with high toughness have high impact resistance and thus are less likely to be damaged. An organic resin film and a thin metal substrate, which are lightweight, enable significant weight reduction as compared to a general glass substrate. With the use of such a substrate, it is possible to fabricate a lightweight liquid crystal display device which is not easily damaged. - In the case of a transmissive or transflective liquid crystal display device, a substrate which has high toughness and transmits visible light may be used as the
transfer substrate 6110. As a material of such a substrate, for example, polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), an acrylic resin, a polyacrylonitrile resin, a polyimide resin, a polymethyl methacrylate resin, a polycarbonate (PC) resin, a polyethersulfone (PES) resin, a polyamide resin, a cycloolefin resin, a polystyrene resin, a polyamide imide resin, and a polyvinylchloride resin can be given. A substrate made of such an organic resin has high toughness and thus has high impact resistance and is less likely to be damaged. Further, a film of such an organic resin, which is lightweight, enables significant reduction in weight of a display device unlike a general glass substrate. In this case, it is preferable that thetransfer substrate 6110 further include ametal plate 6206 provided with an opening in a portion overlapped with at least a region of each pixel through which light is transmitted. With the above structure, thetransfer substrate 6110 which has high toughness and high impact resistance and is less likely to be damaged can be formed while a change in dimension is suppressed. Further, when the thickness of themetal plate 6206 is reduced, thetransfer substrate 6110 which is lighter than a general glass substrate can be formed. With the use of such a substrate, it is possible to fabricate a lightweight liquid crystal display device which is not easily damaged (seeFIG. 20D ). -
FIG. 21A is an example of a top view of a liquid crystal display device. In the case of a display device in which afirst wiring layer 6210 and asecond wiring layer 6211 intersect with each other, and a region surrounded by thefirst wiring layer 6210 and thesecond wiring layer 6211 is a light-transmittingregion 6212 as illustrated inFIG. 21A , themetal plate 6206 having openings formed in a grid so as to leave a portion overlapping with thefirst wiring layer 6210 and/or thesecond wiring layer 6211 as inFIG. 21B may be used. Attachment of themetal plate 6206 makes it possible to suppress a change in dimension due to unfavorable alignment or extension of a substrate because of the use of a substrate made of an organic resin (seeFIG. 21C ). Note that when a polarizing plate (not illustrated) is necessary, it may be provided between thetransfer substrate 6110 and themetal plate 6206 or outside themetal plate 6206. The polarizing plate may be attached to themetal plate 6206 in advance. Note that in terms of weight reduction, a substrate which is thin but has dimension stability is preferably used as themetal plate 6206. - After that, the temporary supporting
substrate 6202 is separated from the layer to be separated 6116. Since the adhesive 6203 for separation includes a material capable of separating the temporary supportingsubstrate 6202 and the layer to be separated 6116 from each other when necessary, the temporary supportingsubstrate 6202 may be separated by a method depending on the material. Note that light is emitted from the backlight as shown by arrows in the drawing (seeFIG. 20E ). - Thus, the layer to be separated 6116, which includes components such as the transistor and the pixel electrode (a counter electrode, a light-blocking film, an alignment film, or the like may also be provided as necessary), can be formed over the
transfer substrate 6110, whereby a lightweight element substrate with high impact resistance can be formed. - The liquid crystal display device having the above structure is one embodiment of the present invention, and the present invention also includes a liquid crystal display device having a structure different from that of the above liquid crystal display device. After the above transfer process (
FIG. 20B ), themetal plate 6206 may be attached to a surface of the exposedseparation layer 6201 or the layer to be separated 6116 before attachment of the transfer substrate 6110 (seeFIG. 20C ′). In that case, abarrier layer 6207 is preferably provided between themetal plate 6206 and the layer to be separated 6116 so that a contaminant from themetal plate 6206 can be prevented from adversely affecting characteristics of the transistor in the layer to be separated 6116. In the case of providing thebarrier layer 6207, thebarrier layer 6207 may be provided over the surface of the exposedseparation layer 6201 or the layer to be separated 6116 before attachment of themetal plate 6206. Thebarrier layer 6207 may be formed using an inorganic material, an organic material, or the like and typically silicon nitride and the like can be given. However, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto as long as contamination of the transistor can be prevented. The barrier layer is formed using a light-transmitting material or formed to a thickness small enough to transmit light so that the barrier layer can transmit at least visible light. Note that themetal plate 6206 may be bonded with the use of a second adhesive layer (not illustrated) including an adhesive different from the adhesive 6203 for separation. - After that, the
first adhesive layer 6111 is formed over a surface of themetal plate 6206 and thetransfer substrate 6110 is attached to the first adhesive layer 6111 (FIG. 20D ′) and the temporary supportingsubstrate 6202 is separated from the layer to be separated 6116 (FIG. 20E ′), whereby a lightweight element substrate with high impact resistance can be formed. Note that light is emitted from the backlight as shown by arrows in the drawing. - The lightweight element substrate with high impact resistance formed as described above is firmly attached to a counter substrate with the use of a sealant with a liquid crystal layer provided between the substrates, whereby a lightweight liquid crystal display device with high impact resistance can be manufactured. As the counter substrate, a substrate which has high toughness and transmits visible light (similar to a plastic substrate which can be used as the transfer substrate 6110) can be used. Further, a polarizing plate, a light-blocking film, a counter electrode, or an alignment film may be provided as necessary. As a method for forming the liquid crystal layer, a dispenser method, an injection method, or the like can be employed as in the conventional case.
- In the case of the lightweight liquid crystal display device with high impact resistance manufactured as described above, a fine element such as the transistor can be formed over a glass substrate or the like which has relatively high dimensional stability, and the conventional manufacturing method can be applied, so that even such a fine element can be formed precisely. Therefore, the lightweight liquid crystal display device with high impact resistance can display images with high precision and high quality.
- Further, the liquid crystal display device manufactured as described above may be flexible.
- This embodiment can be implemented in combination with any of the above embodiments as appropriate.
-
FIGS. 22A and 22B illustrate an example of a pixel which can be used for a liquid crystal display device.FIG. 22A is a top view of the pixel, andFIG. 22B is a cross-sectional view taken along dashed line A1-A2 inFIG. 22A .FIG. 23 is the top view in which atransmissive pixel electrode 505 and areflective pixel electrode 525 inFIG. 22A are omitted so that a structure of the pixel described in this embodiment can be easily understood. - In
FIGS. 22A and 22B , the same reference numerals are used for the same portions as those inFIGS. 2A and 2B . The pixel illustrated inFIGS. 22A and 22B includes awiring 501 functioning as a scan line GL, awiring 502 functioning as a signal line SL, awiring 503 functioning as a common wiring COM, thefirst pixel transistor 16 a, awiring 504 functioning as the second terminal of thefirst pixel transistor 16 a, and awiring 518. Thewiring 501 also functions as the gate electrode of thefirst pixel transistor 16 a illustrated inFIG. 2B . In addition, thewiring 502 also functions as the first terminal of thefirst pixel transistor 16 a. - The pixel illustrated in
FIGS. 22A and 22B includes awiring 511 functioning as an enable line ENR, thesecond pixel transistor 16 b, awiring 521 also functioning as the gate electrode of thesecond pixel transistor 16 b, awiring 522 also functioning as the first terminal of thesecond pixel transistor 16 b, awiring 523 also functioning as the second terminal of thesecond pixel transistor 16 b, and acapacitor electrode 524. - The
wiring 501, thewiring 518, thewiring 521, and thecapacitor electrode 524 can be formed by processing one conductive film formed over asubstrate 500 having an insulating surface with abase film 508 provided therebetween into a desired shape. Agate insulating film 506 is formed over thewiring 501, thewiring 518, thewiring 521, and thecapacitor electrode 524. Thewiring 502, thewiring 503, thewiring 504, thewiring 511, thewiring 522, and thewiring 523 can be formed by processing one conductive film formed over thegate insulating film 506 into a desired shape. - An
active layer 507 of thefirst pixel transistor 16 a is formed over thegate insulating film 506 so as to overlap with thewiring 501. Theactive layer 507 preferably overlaps completely with thewiring 501 functioning as a gate electrode. Anactive layer 527 of thesecond pixel transistor 16 b is formed over thegate insulating film 506 so as to overlap with thewiring 521. Theactive layer 527 preferably overlaps completely with thewiring 521 functioning as a gate electrode. With such a structure, an oxide semiconductor in theactive layer 507 and theactive layer 527 can be prevented from deteriorating owing to incident light from thesubstrate 500 side; thus, deterioration of characteristics of thefirst pixel transistor 16 a and thesecond pixel transistor 16 b, such as a shift of the threshold voltage, can be prevented. - In the pixel illustrated in
FIG. 22B , an insulatingfilm 512 and an insulatingfilm 513 are sequentially formed so as to cover theactive layer 507, thewiring 502, thewiring 504, theactive layer 527, thewiring 522, and thewiring 523. In addition, thetransmissive pixel electrode 505 in a transmissive region and thereflective pixel electrode 525 in a reflective region are formed over the insulatingfilm 513, and thewiring 504 and thewiring 523 are connected to thetransmissive pixel electrode 505 and thereflective pixel electrode 525, respectively, through contact holes formed in the insulatingfilm 512 and the insulatingfilm 513. - The
wiring 518, thewiring 511, thewiring 522, and thewiring 503 are connected to thewiring 504, thewiring 521, thewiring 518, and thecapacitor electrode 524, respectively, through contact holes formed in thegate insulating film 506. A portion where thewiring 503 overlaps with thewiring 518 with thegate insulating film 506 provided therebetween functions as thefirst capacitor 17 a and a portion where thewiring 523 overlaps with thecapacitor electrode 524 with thegate insulating film 506 provided therebetween functions as thesecond capacitor 17 b. - A surface of the insulating
film 513 may be etched selectively so as to be uneven such that thereflective pixel electrode 525 has an uneven surface. When thereflective pixel electrode 525 has an uneven surface, incident light from the outside is irregularly reflected, so that more favorable display can be performed. Accordingly, visibility of display is improved. - By providing the
reflective pixel electrode 525 so as to overlap with theactive layer 507 of thefirst pixel transistor 16 a and theactive layer 527 of thesecond pixel transistor 16 b, the oxide semiconductor in theactive layer 507 and theactive layer 527 can be prevented from deteriorating owing to stray light entered from the pixel electrode side; thus, deterioration of characteristics of thefirst pixel transistor 16 a and thesecond pixel transistor 16 b, such as a shift of the threshold voltage, can be prevented. - Note that in the case of forming a driver circuit on a panel, also by blocking light to a transistor used in the driver circuit with the use of a gate electrode or a light-blocking film, deterioration of characteristics of the transistor, such as a shift of the threshold voltage, can be prevented.
- In
FIG. 22B , an example in which the transmissive pixel electrode 505 (or the reflective pixel electrode 525) overlaps with a counter electrode (not shown) with a liquid crystal layer (not shown) therebetween is described; however, the structure of the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this structure. Like an IPS liquid crystal element or a liquid crystal element using a liquid crystal exhibiting a blue phase, the pixel electrode and the counter electrode may be formed over one substrate. - Next, a panel in the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to
FIGS. 24A and 24B .FIG. 24A is a top view of a panel where asubstrate 4001 and acounter substrate 4006 are bonded to each other with asealant 4005.FIG. 24B corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along broken line A-A′ inFIG. 24A . - The
sealant 4005 is provided so as to surround apixel portion 4002 and a scanline driver circuit 4004 provided over thesubstrate 4001. In addition, thecounter substrate 4006 is provided over thepixel portion 4002 and the scanline driver circuit 4004. Thus, thepixel portion 4002 and the scanline driver circuit 4004 are sealed together with aliquid crystal layer 4007 by thesubstrate 4001, thesealant 4005, and thecounter substrate 4006. - A
substrate 4021 provided with a signalline driver circuit 4003 is mounted in a region which is different from a region surrounded by thesealant 4005 over thesubstrate 4001.FIG. 24B illustrates atransistor 4009 included in the signalline driver circuit 4003. - A plurality of transistors are included in the
pixel portion 4002 and the scanline driver circuit 4004 which are provided over thesubstrate 4001.FIG. 24B illustratestransistors pixel portion 4002. Each of thetransistors film 4040 provided for thecounter substrate 4006 overlaps with a channel formation region of thetransistor 4022. By blocking light to thetransistor 4022, deterioration of an oxide semiconductor of thetransistor 4022 due to light is prevented; thus, deterioration of characteristics of thetransistor 4022, such as a shift of the threshold voltage, can be prevented. - A light-blocking
metal film 4013 formed in the same process as awiring 4014 formed using a metal material overlaps with a channel formation region of thetransistor 4010 a. By blocking light to thetransistor 4010 a with the light-blockingmetal film 4013, deterioration of an oxide semiconductor due to light is prevented; thus, deterioration of characteristics of thetransistor 4010 a, such as a shift of the threshold voltage, can be prevented. The light-blockingmetal film 4013 may be an electrode in a floating state, an electrode electrically connected to the oxide semiconductor of thetransistor 4010 a, or an electrode electrically connected to a gate electrode of thetransistor 4010 a. - Although the number of manufacturing steps is increased, a light-blocking resin film may be used instead of the light-blocking
metal film 4013. The light-blocking resin film containing black colorant such as carbon black may be formed by an inkjet method or the like so as to overlap with the channel formation region of thetransistor 4010 a. - A
pixel electrode 4030 a formed using a light-transmitting conductive film is electrically connected to thetransistor 4010 a. Acounter electrode 4031 is provided for thecounter substrate 4006. A portion where thepixel electrode 4030 a, thecounter electrode 4031, and theliquid crystal layer 4007 overlap with one another corresponds to aliquid crystal element 4011 a in a transmissive region. - A
pixel electrode 4030 b which is a reflective electrode is electrically connected to thetransistor 4010 b. A portion where thepixel electrode 4030 b, thecounter electrode 4031, and theliquid crystal layer 4007 overlap with one another corresponds to aliquid crystal element 4011 b in a reflective region. Thepixel electrode 4030 b which is the reflective electrode overlaps with the channel formation region of thetransistor 4010 b. By blocking light to thetransistor 4010 b, deterioration of an oxide semiconductor of thetransistor 4010 b due to light is prevented; thus, deterioration of characteristics of thetransistor 4010 b, such as a shift of the threshold voltage, can be prevented. - A
spacer 4035 is provided to control a distance (cell gap) between thepixel electrode 4030 a and thecounter electrode 4031 and between thepixel electrode 4030 b and thecounter electrode 4031.FIG. 24B shows the case where thespacer 4035 is formed in a columnar shape by patterning of an insulating film; alternatively, a spherical spacer may be used. - A variety of signals and potentials that are applied to the signal
line driver circuit 4003, the scanline driver circuit 4004, and thepixel portion 4002 are supplied from aconnection terminal 4016 through thewiring 4014 and awiring 4015. Theconnection terminal 4016 is electrically connected to aFPC 4018 and an anisotropicconductive film 4019. - Note that a dispenser method (a dropping method) or a dip method (a pumping method) by which a liquid crystal is injected utilizing a capillary action after the attachment of the
counter substrate 4006 can be used as a method for forming theliquid crystal layer 4007. As illustrated inFIGS. 24A and 24B , in the formation of theliquid crystal layer 4007, apartition 4036 is preferably provided between theliquid crystal layer 4007 and thesealant 4005 so that theliquid crystal layer 4007 and thesealant 4005 are prevented from being mixed with each other. - The
partition 4036 can be formed using the same material and the same steps as those of thespacer 4035. Thepartition 4036 can be formed using, for example, an inorganic material such as silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum oxide, aluminum nitride, aluminum oxynitride, or aluminum nitride oxide, polyimide, an acrylic resin, a benzocyclobutene-based resin, polyamide, an epoxy resin, a siloxane-based resin, or the like. - As a method for forming the
partition 4036, for example, a thin film may be formed by a sputtering method, a vacuum evaporation method, a PVD method, or a CVD method such as a low-pressure CVD (LPCVD) method or a plasma CVD method, and then etched into a desired shape. Thepartition 4036 can be formed by a droplet discharge method by which a pattern can be selectively formed, a printing method by which a pattern can be transferred or drawn (a method for forming a pattern, such as screen printing or offset printing), a coating method such as a spin coating method, a dipping method, a dispenser method, an imprint method, a nanoimprint method, or the like. - An example in which the
liquid crystal layer 4007 is formed by a dispenser method will be described with reference toFIG. 25 . A liquid crystal dropping apparatus inFIG. 25 includes acontrol device 40, an imaging means 42, and ahead 43. Thehead 43 is filled withliquid crystal 44. The liquid crystal dropping apparatus, thesubstrate 4001, and thecounter substrate 4006 can be aligned by taking images of amarker 45 on thesubstrate 4001 and amarker 46 on thecounter substrate 4006 using the imaging means 42. - The
sealant 4005 and thepartition 4036 functioning as a barrier layer formed inside thesealant 4005 are provided for thecounter substrate 4006 in a closed loop pattern, and theliquid crystal 44 is dropped therein once or plural times from thehead 43. When the liquid crystal material has high viscosity, the liquid crystal material is continuously discharged and attached to a liquid crystal formation region without a break. On the other hand, when the liquid crystal material has low viscosity, the liquid crystal material is intermittently discharged to drop a droplet. When theliquid crystal 44 to be dropped has high viscosity, a heater may be provided in thehead 43, so that the viscosity can be adjusted by heating with the heater. - At the time of dropping the
liquid crystal 44 to form theliquid crystal layer 4007, thepartition 4036 is formed as a barrier layer inside thesealant 4005 as illustrated inFIGS. 24A and 24B andFIG. 25 , so that thesealant 4005 and theliquid crystal layer 4007 are not mixed with each other; thus, reaction between thesealant 4005 and theliquid crystal layer 4007, contamination of theliquid crystal layer 4007 by thesealant 4005, or the like can be prevented. - Then, the
substrate 4001 and thecounter substrate 4006 are bonded to each other and ultraviolet curing is performed, so that the enclosed space is filled with liquid crystal; thus, theliquid crystal layer 4007 can be formed. Alternatively, thesealant 4005 may be formed on thesubstrate 4001 side, and a liquid crystal may be dropped. Note that the bonding between thesubstrate 4001 and thecounter substrate 4006 is preferably performed under reduced pressure. - Note that as the
substrate 4001, thecounter substrate 4006, and thesubstrate 4021, glass, ceramics, or plastics can be used. Plastics include, in its category, a fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) plate, a polyvinyl fluoride (PVF) film, a polyester film, an acrylic resin film, and the like. In addition, a sheet having a structure in which an aluminum foil is sandwiched between PVF films can be used. - Note that a substrate placed in a direction in which light is extracted through the
liquid crystal elements -
FIG. 26 is an example of a perspective view of the structure of the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention. The liquid crystal display device illustrated inFIG. 26 includes apanel 1601 including a pixel portion, afirst diffusion plate 1602, aprism sheet 1603, asecond diffusion plate 1604, alight guide plate 1605, abacklight panel 1607, acircuit board 1608, andsubstrates 1611 provided with signal line driver circuits. - The
panel 1601, thefirst diffusion plate 1602, theprism sheet 1603, thesecond diffusion plate 1604, thelight guide plate 1605, and thebacklight panel 1607 are sequentially stacked. Thebacklight panel 1607 includes abacklight 1612 including a plurality of backlight units. Light from thebacklight 1612 that is diffused in thelight guide plate 1605 is delivered to thepanel 1601 through thefirst diffusion plate 1602, theprism sheet 1603, and thesecond diffusion plate 1604. - Although the
first diffusion plate 1602 and thesecond diffusion plate 1604 are used in this embodiment, the number of diffusion plates is not limited to two. The number of diffusion plates may be one, or may be three or more. It is acceptable as long as the diffusion plate is provided between thelight guide plate 1605 and thepanel 1601. Therefore, the diffusion plate may be provided only on the side closer to thepanel 1601 than theprism sheet 1603, or may be provided only on the side closer to thelight guide plate 1605 than theprism sheet 1603. - Further, the shape of the cross section of the
prism sheet 1603, which is shown inFIG. 26 , is not limited to a serrate shape; the shape may be a shape with which light from thelight guide plate 1605 can be gathered to thepanel 1601 side. - The
circuit board 1608 is provided with a circuit which generates various signals input to thepanel 1601, a circuit which processes the signals, or the like. In addition, inFIG. 26 , thecircuit board 1608 and thepanel 1601 are connected to each other viaCOF tapes 1609. Further, thesubstrates 1611 provided with the signal line driver circuits are connected to theCOF tapes 1609 by a chip on film (COF) method. -
FIG. 26 illustrates an example in which thecircuit board 1608 is provided with a control circuit which controls driving of thebacklight 1612, and the control circuit and thebacklight panel 1607 are connected to each other through anFPC 1610. Note that the control circuit may be formed over thepanel 1601. In that case, thepanel 1601 and thebacklight panel 1607 are connected to each other through an FPC or the like. - This embodiment can be implemented in combination with other embodiments as appropriate.
- With a liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention, an electronic device capable of displaying a high-quality image can be provided. With the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention, an electronic device with low power consumption can be provided. In particular, in the case of a portable electronic device to which electric power cannot be easily supplied constantly, continuous use time becomes longer by adding the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention as a component, which is an advantage.
- The liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used for display devices, laptop personal computers, or image reproducing devices provided with recording media (typically, devices which reproduce the content of recording media such as digital versatile discs (DVDs) and have displays for displaying the reproduced images). In addition to the above examples, as electronic devices each including the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention, mobile phones, portable game machines, portable information terminals, e-book readers, video cameras, digital still cameras, goggle-type displays (head mounted displays), navigation systems, audio reproducing devices (e.g., car audio components and digital audio players), copiers, facsimiles, printers, multifunction printers, automated teller machines (ATM), vending machines, and the like can be given. Specific examples of such an electronic device are illustrated in
FIGS. 27A to 27F . -
FIG. 27A illustrates an e-book reader including ahousing 7001, adisplay portion 7002, and the like. A liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used for thedisplay portion 7002. With the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention applied to thedisplay portion 7002, an e-book reader capable of displaying a high-quality image or an e-book reader with low power consumption can be provided. Moreover, when a panel is formed with the use of a flexible substrate and a touch panel has flexibility, the liquid crystal display device can have flexibility; thus, a flexible, lightweight, and easy-to-use e-book reader can be provided. -
FIG. 27B illustrates a display device including ahousing 7011, adisplay portion 7012, a supportingbase 7013, and the like. A liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used for thedisplay portion 7012. With the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention applied to thedisplay portion 7012, a display device capable of displaying a high-quality image or a display device with low power consumption can be provided. The display device includes in its category, any information display device for personal computers, TV broadcast reception, advertisement, and the like. -
FIG. 27C illustrates an automated teller machine including ahousing 7021, adisplay portion 7022, acoin slot 7023, abill slot 7024, acard slot 7025, abankbook slot 7026, and the like. A liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used for thedisplay portion 7022. With the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention applied to thedisplay portion 7022, an automated teller machine capable of displaying a high-quality image or an automated teller machine with low power consumption can be provided. -
FIG. 27D illustrates a portable game machine including ahousing 7031, ahousing 7032, adisplay portion 7033, adisplay portion 7034, amicrophone 7035,speakers 7036, anoperation key 7037, astylus 7038, and the like. A liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used for thedisplay portion 7033 or thedisplay portion 7034. With the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention applied to thedisplay portion 7033 or thedisplay portion 7034, a portable game machine capable of displaying a high-quality image or a portable game machine with low power consumption can be provided. Note that the portable game machine illustrated inFIG. 27D has the twodisplay portions -
FIG. 27E illustrates a mobile phone which includes ahousing 7041, a display portion 7042, anaudio input portion 7043, anaudio output portion 7044,operation keys 7045, a light-receivingportion 7046, and the like. Light received in the light-receivingportion 7046 is converted into electrical signals, whereby external images can be loaded. A liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used for the display portion 7042. With the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention applied to the display portion 7042, a mobile phone capable of displaying a high-quality image or a mobile phone with low power consumption can be provided. -
FIG. 27F illustrates a portable information terminal including ahousing 7051, adisplay portion 7052,operation keys 7053, and the like. A modem may be incorporated in thehousing 7051 of the portable information terminal illustrated inFIG. 27F . A liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used for thedisplay portion 7052. With the liquid crystal display device according to one embodiment of the present invention applied to thedisplay portion 7052, a portable information terminal capable of displaying a high-quality image or a portable information terminal with low power consumption can be provided. - This example can be implemented in combination with any of the above-described embodiments as appropriate.
- This application is based on Japanese Patent Application serial no. 2010-178173 filed with Japan Patent Office on Aug. 6, 2010, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
Claims (17)
1. (canceled)
2. A display device comprising:
a pixel portion comprising a pixel comprising:
a first transistor and a second transistor electrically connected to each other in series;
a first pixel electrode electrically connected to a signal line through the first transistor but not through the second transistor; and
a second pixel electrode electrically connected to the signal line through the first transistor and the second transistor,
wherein a gate of the first transistor is electrically connected to a scan line,
wherein a gate of the second transistor is electrically connected to an enable line, and
wherein each of the first transistor and the second transistor comprises an oxide semiconductor layer comprising indium, gallium, zinc, and oxygen.
3. The display device according to claim 2 , wherein the first pixel electrode is transparent.
4. The display device according to claim 2 , wherein the second pixel electrode is reflective.
5. The display device according to claim 2 , wherein the enable line is provided across the scan line.
6. The display device according to claim 2 , wherein the enable line is provided in a layer different from the scan line.
7. The display device according to claim 2 , comprising a liquid crystal layer over the first pixel electrode and the second pixel electrode.
8. The display device according to claim 7 , comprising a counter electrode over the liquid crystal layer.
9. The display device according to claim 2 , wherein the first pixel electrode and the second pixel electrode are provided on and in contact with a same surface.
10. A display device comprising:
a pixel portion comprising a first pixel in a first row and a second pixel in a second row that is different from the first row, each of the first pixel and the second pixel comprising:
a first transistor and a second transistor electrically connected to each other in series;
a first pixel electrode electrically connected to a signal line through the first transistor but not through the second transistor; and
a second pixel electrode electrically connected to the signal line through the first transistor and the second transistor,
wherein a gate of the first transistor in the first pixel is electrically connected to a first scan line,
wherein a gate of the first transistor in the second pixel is electrically connected to a second scan line,
wherein a gate of the second transistor in the first pixel is electrically connected to a gate of the second transistor in the second pixel through an enable line, and
wherein each of the first transistor and the second transistor in each of the first pixel and the second pixel comprises an oxide semiconductor layer comprising indium, gallium, zinc, and oxygen.
11. The display device according to claim 10 , wherein the first pixel electrode is transparent.
12. The display device according to claim 10 , wherein the second pixel electrode is reflective.
13. The display device according to claim 10 , wherein the enable line is provided across the first scan line and the second scan line.
14. The display device according to claim 10 , wherein the enable line is provided in a layer different from the first scan line and the second scan line.
15. The display device according to claim 10 , comprising a liquid crystal layer over the first pixel electrode and the second pixel electrode.
16. The display device according to claim 15 , comprising a counter electrode over the liquid crystal layer.
17. The display device according to claim 10 , wherein the first pixel electrode and the second pixel electrode are provided on and in contact with a same surface.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US15/358,815 US20170140719A1 (en) | 2010-08-06 | 2016-11-22 | Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2010178173 | 2010-08-06 | ||
JP2010-178173 | 2010-08-06 | ||
US13/193,769 US9507220B2 (en) | 2010-08-06 | 2011-07-29 | Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof |
US15/358,815 US20170140719A1 (en) | 2010-08-06 | 2016-11-22 | Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/193,769 Continuation US9507220B2 (en) | 2010-08-06 | 2011-07-29 | Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20170140719A1 true US20170140719A1 (en) | 2017-05-18 |
Family
ID=45555909
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/193,769 Active 2032-09-30 US9507220B2 (en) | 2010-08-06 | 2011-07-29 | Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof |
US15/358,815 Abandoned US20170140719A1 (en) | 2010-08-06 | 2016-11-22 | Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/193,769 Active 2032-09-30 US9507220B2 (en) | 2010-08-06 | 2011-07-29 | Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US9507220B2 (en) |
JP (1) | JP5825895B2 (en) |
KR (1) | KR101913857B1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20240021115A1 (en) * | 2022-07-13 | 2024-01-18 | Joled Inc. | Display device |
Families Citing this family (21)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2012103683A (en) | 2010-10-14 | 2012-05-31 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Display device and driving method for the same |
US10126803B1 (en) | 2011-04-04 | 2018-11-13 | Google Llc | Conditional power management activities |
US9601059B2 (en) * | 2012-05-15 | 2017-03-21 | Google Inc. | Dynamic backlight control selector |
JP2014032399A (en) * | 2012-07-13 | 2014-02-20 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Liquid crystal display device |
CN102779485A (en) * | 2012-07-17 | 2012-11-14 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Backlight scanning method, backlight scanning device and liquid crystal display device |
JP2014199899A (en) * | 2012-08-10 | 2014-10-23 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device |
WO2014077295A1 (en) | 2012-11-15 | 2014-05-22 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device |
TWI627483B (en) | 2012-11-28 | 2018-06-21 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Display device and television receiver |
TWI613709B (en) * | 2013-02-20 | 2018-02-01 | 財團法人工業技術研究院 | Semiconductor device structure, method for manufacturing the same and pixel structure using the same |
KR102069178B1 (en) | 2013-08-07 | 2020-01-23 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Method of displaying an image and display apparatus performing the method |
KR20160014179A (en) * | 2014-07-28 | 2016-02-11 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Method of driving display panel and display apparatus for performing the same |
CN104282254B (en) * | 2014-08-21 | 2017-02-15 | 深圳创锐思科技有限公司 | Display system imaging quality adjusting method, display device and display system |
JP2016066065A (en) | 2014-09-05 | 2016-04-28 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device and electronic device |
KR20170091139A (en) | 2014-12-01 | 2017-08-08 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Display device, display module having said display device, and electronic device having said display device or said display module |
US9709710B2 (en) * | 2015-03-06 | 2017-07-18 | Samsung Sdi Co., Ltd. | Device including light blocking layer and method of patterning the light blocking layer |
KR101916782B1 (en) * | 2015-03-06 | 2018-11-08 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Device including black matrix and patterning method of the black matrix |
WO2017055971A1 (en) * | 2015-10-01 | 2017-04-06 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and manufacturing method thereof |
CN107293264B (en) * | 2016-04-04 | 2021-07-20 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Display device, display module, and electronic apparatus |
TW201824219A (en) * | 2016-09-30 | 2018-07-01 | 半導體能源硏究所股份有限公司 | Display device and electronic device include a signal generation circuit, a first gate driver, a second gate driver, and a second display section stopping the first scanning signal outputted by the first gate driver and the second scanning signal outputted by the second gate driver, etc. |
KR20200111215A (en) * | 2018-02-09 | 2020-09-28 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | How to drive the display device |
CN112513965B (en) | 2018-07-31 | 2024-10-01 | 日亚化学工业株式会社 | Image display device |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20050018113A1 (en) * | 2003-07-25 | 2005-01-27 | Yuh-Ren Shen | Pixel structure |
US20060103800A1 (en) * | 2004-10-29 | 2006-05-18 | Wang-Yang Li | Multi-domain vertically aligned liquid crystal display |
US20080297702A1 (en) * | 2005-11-24 | 2008-12-04 | Yong Gu Cho | Light Emitting Diode Package and Driving Method Thereof |
US20080303020A1 (en) * | 2007-05-29 | 2008-12-11 | Hyun-Soo Shin | Thin film transistor, flat panel display device having the same, and associated methods |
US20080309840A1 (en) * | 2007-06-15 | 2008-12-18 | Himax Technologies Inc. | Pixel element and liquid crystal display |
Family Cites Families (48)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP0997868B1 (en) | 1998-10-30 | 2012-03-14 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Field sequential liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof, and head mounted display |
JP3559922B2 (en) * | 1998-12-15 | 2004-09-02 | 富士通株式会社 | Liquid crystal display |
US6597348B1 (en) | 1998-12-28 | 2003-07-22 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Information-processing device |
US7145536B1 (en) | 1999-03-26 | 2006-12-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device |
US6882012B2 (en) | 2000-02-28 | 2005-04-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and a method of manufacturing the same |
TW518552B (en) | 2000-08-18 | 2003-01-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Liquid crystal display device, method of driving the same, and method of driving a portable information device having the liquid crystal display device |
JP4303906B2 (en) * | 2000-09-27 | 2009-07-29 | 東芝モバイルディスプレイ株式会社 | Transflective liquid crystal display device |
US6771334B2 (en) | 2000-09-27 | 2004-08-03 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Transflective liquid crystal display device |
US7385579B2 (en) | 2000-09-29 | 2008-06-10 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device and method of driving the same |
JP2003248463A (en) | 2002-02-25 | 2003-09-05 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Liquid crystal display device |
TWI247162B (en) * | 2002-05-15 | 2006-01-11 | Toppoly Optoelectronics Corp | Circuit structure of thin film transistor |
JP2004077567A (en) | 2002-08-09 | 2004-03-11 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Display device and driving method therefor |
US7193593B2 (en) | 2002-09-02 | 2007-03-20 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device and method of driving a liquid crystal display device |
JP2004094058A (en) | 2002-09-02 | 2004-03-25 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Liquid crystal display and its driving method |
JP2004126199A (en) * | 2002-10-02 | 2004-04-22 | Toppoly Optoelectronics Corp | Display circuit structure for liquid crystal display |
TWI368774B (en) | 2003-07-14 | 2012-07-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Light-emitting device |
JP2005148173A (en) * | 2003-11-12 | 2005-06-09 | Tatsuo Uchida | Full color liquid crystal display method and device |
US7791571B2 (en) | 2004-04-22 | 2010-09-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device and driving method of the same |
JP2006220685A (en) | 2005-02-08 | 2006-08-24 | 21 Aomori Sangyo Sogo Shien Center | Method and device for driving divisional drive field sequential color liquid crystal display using scan backlight |
US7286192B2 (en) * | 2005-06-07 | 2007-10-23 | Au Optronics Corporation | Transflective liquid crystal display |
JP4772057B2 (en) * | 2005-10-05 | 2011-09-14 | 富士通株式会社 | Liquid crystal display device and display method |
JP2007121368A (en) * | 2005-10-25 | 2007-05-17 | Epson Imaging Devices Corp | Liquid crystal device, and electronic device |
JP2007264211A (en) | 2006-03-28 | 2007-10-11 | 21 Aomori Sangyo Sogo Shien Center | Color display method for color-sequential display liquid crystal display apparatus |
JP4873976B2 (en) * | 2006-03-29 | 2012-02-08 | 京セラ株式会社 | Transflective liquid crystal display panel, transflective liquid crystal display device, and transflective liquid crystal display system |
US8106865B2 (en) | 2006-06-02 | 2012-01-31 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and driving method thereof |
US8154493B2 (en) | 2006-06-02 | 2012-04-10 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device, driving method of the same, and electronic device using the same |
JP4404881B2 (en) * | 2006-08-09 | 2010-01-27 | 日本電気株式会社 | Thin film transistor array, manufacturing method thereof, and liquid crystal display device |
US20080252804A1 (en) | 2007-04-13 | 2008-10-16 | Toshiba Matsushita Display Technology Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device |
JP2008281982A (en) * | 2007-04-13 | 2008-11-20 | Toshiba Matsushita Display Technology Co Ltd | Liquid crystal display device |
JP5542297B2 (en) * | 2007-05-17 | 2014-07-09 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Liquid crystal display device, display module, and electronic device |
JP5200209B2 (en) | 2007-08-08 | 2013-06-05 | エプソンイメージングデバイス株式会社 | Liquid crystal display |
CN101369075B (en) * | 2007-08-15 | 2010-05-26 | 群康科技(深圳)有限公司 | Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof |
JP5489445B2 (en) * | 2007-11-15 | 2014-05-14 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Thin film field effect transistor and display device using the same |
JP4682279B2 (en) | 2008-03-21 | 2011-05-11 | 奇美電子股▲ふん▼有限公司 | Liquid crystal display |
KR101703511B1 (en) | 2008-06-27 | 2017-02-07 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Thin film transistor |
US8530897B2 (en) | 2008-12-11 | 2013-09-10 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device including an inverter circuit having a microcrystalline layer |
JP5100670B2 (en) | 2009-01-21 | 2012-12-19 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Touch panel, electronic equipment |
US8451407B2 (en) * | 2009-06-30 | 2013-05-28 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display and method of manufacturing the same |
CN105353551A (en) | 2009-12-28 | 2016-02-24 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Liquid crystal display device and electronic device |
KR101781788B1 (en) | 2009-12-28 | 2017-09-26 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Liquid crystal display device and electronic device |
WO2011089850A1 (en) * | 2010-01-20 | 2011-07-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for driving liquid crystal display device |
US8907881B2 (en) | 2010-04-09 | 2014-12-09 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device and method for driving the same |
US8830278B2 (en) | 2010-04-09 | 2014-09-09 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device and method for driving the same |
CN102213854B (en) | 2010-04-09 | 2015-08-05 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Liquid crystal indicator and electronic equipment |
TWI410726B (en) * | 2010-05-04 | 2013-10-01 | Au Optronics Corp | Active device array substrate |
TWI541782B (en) | 2010-07-02 | 2016-07-11 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Liquid crystal display device |
US9336739B2 (en) | 2010-07-02 | 2016-05-10 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device |
WO2012002197A1 (en) | 2010-07-02 | 2012-01-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device |
-
2011
- 2011-07-20 JP JP2011158648A patent/JP5825895B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-29 US US13/193,769 patent/US9507220B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-05 KR KR1020110078136A patent/KR101913857B1/en active IP Right Grant
-
2016
- 2016-11-22 US US15/358,815 patent/US20170140719A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20050018113A1 (en) * | 2003-07-25 | 2005-01-27 | Yuh-Ren Shen | Pixel structure |
US20060103800A1 (en) * | 2004-10-29 | 2006-05-18 | Wang-Yang Li | Multi-domain vertically aligned liquid crystal display |
US20080297702A1 (en) * | 2005-11-24 | 2008-12-04 | Yong Gu Cho | Light Emitting Diode Package and Driving Method Thereof |
US20080303020A1 (en) * | 2007-05-29 | 2008-12-11 | Hyun-Soo Shin | Thin film transistor, flat panel display device having the same, and associated methods |
US20080309840A1 (en) * | 2007-06-15 | 2008-12-18 | Himax Technologies Inc. | Pixel element and liquid crystal display |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20240021115A1 (en) * | 2022-07-13 | 2024-01-18 | Joled Inc. | Display device |
US12106691B2 (en) * | 2022-07-13 | 2024-10-01 | Jdi Design And Development G.K. | Display device |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP5825895B2 (en) | 2015-12-02 |
KR20120033230A (en) | 2012-04-06 |
US20120033151A1 (en) | 2012-02-09 |
JP2012053455A (en) | 2012-03-15 |
US9507220B2 (en) | 2016-11-29 |
KR101913857B1 (en) | 2018-10-31 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US9507220B2 (en) | Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof | |
US11289031B2 (en) | Liquid crystal display device | |
US9336739B2 (en) | Liquid crystal display device | |
US9293104B2 (en) | Liquid crystal display device | |
US11176900B2 (en) | Display device | |
CN106328085B (en) | Display device and driving method thereof | |
TWI527244B (en) | Semiconductor device and electronic device | |
TWI613825B (en) | Semiconductor device having stacked wirings | |
KR20160028388A (en) | Semiconductor device and electronic device | |
JP6487503B2 (en) | Liquid crystal display | |
US12125453B2 (en) | Display device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |